Prasanna – Page 31 – PSEB Solutions

PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 4 Sport Injuries

September 21, 2024September 20, 2024 by Prasanna

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physical Education Chapter 4 Sport Injuries

Physical Education Guide for Class 12 PSEB Sport Injuries Textbook Questions and Answers

One Mark Question-Answers

Question 1.
What are sports injuries?
Answer:
A sports injury may be defined as “damage to the tissues of the body that occurs as a result of sport or exercise” due to overuse, twisting and strectching.

Question 2.
Write any two symptoms of sprain.
Answer:

Burning, pain, and swelling.
Severe pain during movement.

Question 3.
Who participates in sports besides players or sports persons?
Answer:
The persons with active lifestyle and performing regular exercises takes part in sports.

Two Marks Question-Answers

Question 4.
What is compound fracture?
Answer:
It is one in which the skin or mucous membrane wound extends to the fractured bone.

Question 5.
What is green stick fracture?
Answer:
A fracture in which only one side may get broken and the bone then appears to be bent, but not broken. It is most common in children.

Question 6.
What are indirect injuries?
Answer:
The injury does not result from physical contact with an object or person but it caused due to internal force built up the action of the performer such as overstretching and poor technique.

Three Marks Question-Answers

Question 7.
What is strain? What are the symptoms of strain?
Answer:
Strain is a disruption of the fibres of a muscle or tendon. Tears or strains occur when a muscle or tendon is over-stretched or when a muscle contracts too quickly. The causes of strain occur while lifting weights, muscles are stretched during sudden jerky motion, landing badly on an ankle or walking or exercising on uneven surface. This type of injury generally causes sprains in knees or ankles.

Symptoms:

Sudden pain at the site of injury.
Fitness and cramps.
Swelling at the site of the injuries and sometimes redness also appears.
Tenderness.
No movement and numbness.

Question 8.
Write the treatment of the following:
Answer:
(i) Sprain:
There are few steps for prevention of sprains:

Sprain is firstly treated as ‘PRICE’, where ‘P’ stands for ‘protection’ and ‘R’ stands for ‘Rest’, ‘I’ stands for ‘Ice application’, ‘C’ stands for ‘Compression’ and E stands for ‘Elevation’. Rest the sprained area. If necessary, use sling for an arm injury or crutches for a leg or foot injury. Apply ice on an injured part for 20 minutes every hour. Never put ice directly against skin or it may damage the skin.
Give comfortable position to the patient.
Provide support to the injured part.
Immobilize and elevate the injured part.
Cold compression is given to reduce swelling.
Hot formation is applied to absorb the blood collection and reduce discolouration.
Apply firm elastic bandage.
Shift the patient to the hospital as soon as possible for the medical aid.

(ii) Abrasion:

Use protective gear like helmet, knee pads, elbow pads, glasses etc. while doing activities.
Use anti itching cream over and near abrasion area.
If cut has bleeding, apply gentle pressure with clean cloth. Hold the pressure for 20 to 30
minutes.
Immediately rinse out the wound with clear water, do not use soap over it, it may irritate the wound. Through wound cleaning reduces the risk of tetanus.
After cleaning the wound, apply antibiotic cream over it to moist the surface.
Use bandage to keep the wound clean and keep harmful bacteria out.
Use ice to reduce the swelling.
Call doctor if scrape is very large and dirty and one is unable to remove debris and dirt, which may cause further infection.

(iii) Strain:

Strain is firstly treated as PRICE, where ‘P’ stands for ‘protection’ and ‘R’ stands for ‘Rest’, ‘I’ stands for ‘Ice Application’, C stands for ‘Compression’ and ‘E’ stands for ‘Elevation’. The first thing is to immobilize or rest the sprained area. If necessary, use sling for an arm injury or crutches for a leg or foot injury. Apply ice on an injured part for atleast 20 minutes after every hour. Never put ice directly against skin or it may damage the skin.
Place the patient in a comfortable position.
Immobilized the injured area.
Steady and support the injured part.
Elevate the injure injured part.
Continue ‘RICE’ for 24 to 48 hours.
Shift the patient to the hospital or consult doctor.

(iv) Dislocation:
1. Pain Reduction:
During this process, the doctor may try some gentle movements around the affected joint to help the bones back into position. In case of severe pain local anaesthetic procedures are adopted.

2. Immobilization:
After getting the bones at normal position the joint should be immobilized with a splint or sling for several weeks. The time for which sling or splint is to be used depends upon extent of damage to nerves, blood vessels and supporting tissues.

3. Surgery:
If reduction is not able to settle the joint then surgical technique can be used to move dislocated bones back into their correct positions. Even in case of ruptured nearby blood vessels, nerves or ligaments surgery is required.

4. Rehabilitation:
Rehabilitation process is started after the splint or sling is removed. For the dislocated joint the rehabilitation exercises should be designed in such a way that the gradual load is given. The aim of rehabilitation is to restore normal range of motion and strength around the joint.

Question 9.
What do you know about impact?
Answer:
It is common to suffer from injuries during competitive sports. In order to win at any cost, sportsperson performed with zeal and fast pace in competitions. In this stituation, the players sometimes come directly in contact with other player and causes injury. The common sports activities in which players suffer injuries due to direct impact are kabaddi, wrestling, boxing, football, hockey etc.

Five Marks Question-Answers

Question 10.
Explain the types of fracture in detail.
Answer:
Fracture:
A fracture is a break in the continuity of bone. Fracture occurs when the bone is subjected to stress greater than it can absorb. Fracture can be caused by a direct blow, force, sudden twisting motion and even extreme muscles contraction. The causes of fracture can be direct force, indirect force, force of muscular action and force of ligament. There are following types of bone fractures that may occur during playing or due to accident:

1. Closed Fracture/Simple Fracture:
Its simply the break down of bone in two pieces. It does not produce a break in the skin.

2. Open Fracture/Compound Fracture:
It is one in which the skin or mucous membrane wound extends to the fracture bone.

3. Commuted Fracture: A fracture in which bone has splintered into several fragments.

4. Complicated Fracture:
A fracture in which the fractured bone fragment is driven into another organs or ligaments such as fracture in throacic bone may affect lungs etc.
PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 4 Sport Injuries 1
5. Green Stick Fracture:
A fracture in which only one side may get broken and the bone then appears to be bent, but not broken. It is most common in children.

6. Hair line Fracture:
In this type of fracture the thin hair line crack appears in the bone.

7. Depressed Fracture:
A fracture in which fragments are driven inward. This type of fracture can be seen in flat bones such as skull bones etc.

Question 11.
Describe sports injuries. Also write the reasons of sports injuries.
Answer:
A sports injury may be defined as “damage to the tissues of the body that occurs as a result of sport or exercise”. Sports injuries can be classified according to the cause of the injury or the type of tissues damaged.

If we divide injury according to the cause then it can be categorised as under:
1. Direct Injury: A direct injury is caused by an external blow or force.

2. Indirect injury:
The injury does not result from physical contact with an object or person, but from internal forces built up by the actions of the performer, such as may be caused by overstretching, poor technique, etc.

3. Overuse injury:
Overuse injuries occur when excessive and repetitive force is placed on the bones and other connective tissues of the body.

If injuries are classified according to the damaged tissues then we can classify them as follows:
1. Soft Tissue Injuries:
Soft-tissue injuries are the most common injuries resulting from participation in sport. It occurs to muscles, tendons, ligaments and the skin. These injuries include sprain, strain, contusion, abrasion, laceration and blisters.

2. Hard Tissue Injuries:
Hard tissue injuries include injuries to bones or around joints i.e., fracture and dislocations.
Reasons of Sports Injuries. Sports injuries are commonly caused due to overuse, over twisting, over stretching, collision, etc. These injuries can be mild to severe. Most of the injuries are caused due to lack of knowledge. Sports injuries can occur on the play field or while playing due to reasons given ahead:

1. Poor Physical Fitness of Player:
Physical fitness is required for better performance. Physical fitness can be achieved with regular practice. All components like strength, speed, flexibility, endurance, agility, power, balance etc must be possess by the athlete. Lack of physical fitness then causes injury.

2. Due to Poor Psychological Preparation:
If athlete is stressful, full of anxiety or may be playing in tension can be injured easily. For prevention of injury, one must be psychologically prepared for the event.

3. Inadequate warming up before match:
Warming-up is very important for the prevention of injuries. The stretching exercises done during the warm-up session often prevent injuries such as sprain and strain. After proper warming up, the body becomes ready to bear any sort of physical stress. That is why it has been always suggested to begin more vigorous activity after having proper warm-up exercises.

4. Lack of knowledge of proper technique:
By using the accurate technique one can reduce the risk of overuse injuries, such as tendonitis and stress fractures. The injuries like tennis elbow are due to improper technique and overuse. If you are unsure about the correct technique, a qualified sports coach can give you advice. If you exercise in a gym or a leisure centre, ask a fitness instructor or member of gym staff for help.

5. By using substandard sports equipment:
Half of the game can be won by using good equipment. Substandard or poor quality equipment causes injuries during match or practice. Hence, it is always recommeded to use quality equipment during game.

6. Lack of knowledge of rules and regulation of game:
The rules are formulated keeping in view the safety of the sportsmen. Rules of conduct, including illegal blocks and tackles are enforced to keep athlete injury free. Many games have rule of “no body contact” to avoid injuries. By playing under discipline the injuries can be prevented.

7. Bad conditions of Play fields:
The equipment and play fields having all safety measures can save lots of sports injuries. For example running on synthetic track as compared to mud track has less chance of injuries. In basketball safety pads on poles can protect injuries.

8. Due to Arrogance of Player:
Sometimes aggressive players intensely injured other players with intension to injure. To avoid such type of injury, they must be punished at the time.

9. Due to Bad Climate:
Bad climates like sudden rain or uneven ground or may be weather condition like severe cold or hot weather can also cause injury sometimes.

10. Due to Lack of Match Practice:
As we know practice makes a man perfect, athlete must be well prepared and practiced before match. Every day match practice is required for coordination, understanding with fellow team mates, conditioned body movements etc for the prevention of injuries.

Question 12.
Write the meaning and principles of first aid.
Answer:
“First aid is the immediate treatment given to the victim of sudden illness before medical help is made available”. It is applied to prevent further injury, reduce pain experienced by the patient, and shock from the injury. The most important basic concept in first aid is to stop bleeding, restore adequate breathing and treat the patient from shock.

This is very necessary to make sure that the patient has an open airway, is breathing appropriately, and has circulation intact i.e. pulses, normal skin colour and no uncontrolled bleeding. If the patient has stable other specific injuries can be addressed with first aid. The basic concepts of first aid includes keeping wounds clean, applying pressure to stop bleeding and keeping suspected broken bones immobile until they can be evaluated and aligned appropriately.

Principles of First Aid. The basic principles of First aid are as follows:

Do first thing fast and quickly, quietly and without panic.
Guard against a treat shock by moving the causality as little as possible.
Do not attempt too much.
Reassure the causality and those around in order to reduce tension.
Give artificial respiration if required.
Try to stop bleeding.
Do not allow people around patient as fresh air is required.
Do not change or remove clothes unnecessarily.
Arrange immediate vehicle or ambulance to take patient to the hospital.

PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Guide Sport Injuries Important Questions and Answers

One Mark Question-Answers

Question 1.
Give full form of PRICE.
Answer:
Protection, Rest, Ice application, compression, elevation.

Question 2.
Enlist any two soft tissue injuries.
Answer:
Sprain and contusion.

Question 3.
Write any two hard tissue injuries.
Answer:
Fracture, Dislocation.

Question 4.
What is direct injury?
Answer:
A direct injury is caused by external blow or force.

Question 5.
Enlist any two causes of sports injury.
Answer:

Poor physical fitness of player
Due to inadequate warming up.

Question 6.
Give any two safety measures for injuries.
Answer:

Preventive Measures.
Curative Measures.

Question 7.
Highlight two principles of First Aid.
Answer:
(i) Do first thing fast and quickly, quietly and without panic.
(ii) Do not attempt too much.

Question 8.
Define First Aid.
Answer:
First aid is the immediate treatment given to the victim of sudden illness before medical help is made available.

Question 9.
Enlist various types of strain.
Answer:
(i) Acute strain
(ii) Chomic strain.

Question 10.
Give two causes of strain.
Answer:
(i) Excessive stretching.
(ii) Sudden movement.

Question 11.
What are the symptoms of strains? Give any two.
Answer:
(i) Sudden pain, swelling, burning at the site of injury
(ii) Excessive pain during movement.

Question 12.
What should be the duration of ice application in sprain?
Answer:
20 minutes every hour.

Question 13.
Highlight any two symptoms of contusion.
Answer:

Burning of the skin
Localized pain to the injured area.

Question 14.
Enlist various type of Abrasion.
Answer:
Scratches, Grazes, Pressure abrasion, Impact abrasion.

Question 15.
Give any two types of fracture?
Answer:

Green stick fracture
Commuted fracture.

Question 16.
What are the symptoms of fracture?
Answer:

Severe pain
Swelling around the injured area.

Question 17.
What is chronic strain?
Answer:
A chronic strain results from prolonged repetitive movements of a muscles. This may occur during events for example Gymnastics, Tennis, Rowing and Golf etc.

Question 18.
How many hours PRICE principle should be applied?
Answer:
24 hours to 48 hours.

Question 19.
What is ordinary sprain?
Answer:
It is mild in nature and little swelling can be seen which has no impact on movements and functions.

Question 20.
What do you mean by laceration?
Answer:
Laceration is the cut over the skin. It is minor wound on skin.

Question 21.
What do you mean by depressed fracture?
Answer:
A fracture in which fragments are driven inward. This type of fracture can be seen in flat bones such as skull bones etc.

Question 22.
What is complicated fracture?
Answer:
A fracture in which the fractured bone fragment is driven into another organs or ligaments such as fracture in throacic bone may affect lungs etc.

Question 23.
What is commuted fracture?
Answer:
A fracture in which bone has splintered into several fragments.

Two Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
What are major injuries?
Answer:
These injuries are commonly affect muscles, tendons, skin etc. and major injuries are: Sprain, Strain, Contusion, Abrasion, laceration, bruises, fracture, dislocation.

Question 2.
What do you understand by sprain?
Answer:
A sprain is a tear of ligament fibres, muscles or tendons supporting a joint or it is defined as an injury to the ligament and joint capsule. Sprain occurs when joint is extended beyond its normal range, sudden movement, twisting of the part involving joint.

Question 3.
Write about the principles of First Aid.
Answer:

Do first thing fast and quickly, quietly and without panic.
Guard against a treat shock by moving the causality as little as possible.
Do not attempt too much.

Question 4.
Enlist various causes of sports injuries.
Answer:

Poor Physical fitness of player
Due to poor psychological preparation
Inadequate warming up before match.

Question 5.
Highlight various soft tissue related injuries.
Answer:
Soft-tissue injuries are the most common injuries resulting from participation in sport. It occurs to muscles, tendons, ligaments and skin. These injuries include sprain, strain, contusion, abrasion, laceration, blisters and incision.

Question 6.
What do you understand by contusion?
Answer:
A contusion or bruise is bleeding into the soft tissue. It is caused by a direct blow from another person or a direct hit by a blunt object. A bruise can occur to any soft tissue of the body. In contusion capillaries are ruptured and swelling, bleeding and pain appear on the injured part.

Question 7.
Elucidate the term abrasion.
Answer:
Abrasion occurs when the outer layer of skin is removed, usually as a result of a scraping action. It may be any grade of severity from a simple scraping away of a layer of skin to very extensive damage. The open wound can contain dirt or gravel, which should be removed to avoid further infection.

Question 8.
Enlist various types of hard tissue injuries.
Answer:
Hard tissue injuries include injuries to bones or around joints i.e., fracture and dislocations.

Question 9.
Write any two symptoms of dislocation of bones.
Answer:

Severe pain in the joint.
Reduction in movement around the joint.
Joint looks deformed.
Swelling appears.

Question 10.
What do you understand by the term ‘PRICE’?
Answer:
Protection, Rest, Ice, application, Compression and Elevation.

Question 11.
Elucidate soft tissues injuries.
Answer:
Soft-tissue injuries are the most common injuries resulting from participation in sport. It occurs to muscles, tendons, ligaments and the skin. These injuries include sprain, strain, contusion, abrasion, laceration, blisters and incision.

Question 12.
Differentiate between direct and indirect injury.
Answer:
(a) Direct Injury: A direct injury is caused by an external blow or force.
(b) Indirect injury: The injury does not result from physical contact with an object or person, but from internal forces built up by the actions of the performer, such as may be caused by overstretching, poor technique, etc.

Question 13.
Differentiate between soft tissue and hard tissue injury.
Answer:
Soft Tissue Injuries:
Soft-tissue injuries are the most common injuries resulting from participation in sport. It occurs to muscles, tendons, ligaments and the skin. These injuries include sprain, strain, contusion, abrasion, laceration and blisters.

Hard Tissue Injuries: Hard tissue injuries include injuries to bones or around joints i.e., fracture and dislocations.

Question 14.
Enlist various principles of First Aid.
Answer:

Try to stop bleeding.
Do not allow people around patient as fresh air is required.
Do not change or remove clothes unnecessarily.
Arrange immediate vehicle or ambulance to take patient to the hospital.

Question 15.
What are the symptoms of strain?
Answer:

Burning, pain, and swelling.
Severe pain during movement.
Discoloration
Tenderness.

Question 16.
Give any two reasons of strain.
Answer:

Over stretching.
Sudden movement.

Question 17.
What do you know about sprain?
Answer:
A sprain is a tear of ligament fibres, muscles or tendons supporting a joint or it is defined as an injury to the ligament and joint capsule. Sprain occurs when joint is extended beyond its normal range, sudden movement, twisting of the part involving joint.

Question 18.
Define contusion.
Answer:
A contusion or bruise is bleeding into the soft tissue. It is caused by a direct blow from another person or a direct hit by a blunt object. A bruise can occur to any soft tissue of the body. In contusion capillaries are ruptured and swelling, bleeding and pain appear on the injured part.

Three Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
What is strain? What are the symptoms of strain?
Answer:
Strain is a disruption of the fibres of a muscle or tendon. Tears or strains occur when a muscle or tendon is over-stretched or when a muscle contracts too quickly. The causes of strain occur while lifting weights, muscles are stretched during sudden jerky motion, landing badly on an ankle or walking or exercising on uneven surface. This type of injury generally causes sprains in knees or ankles.

Sign and symptoms:

Sudden pain at the site of injury.
Stifhess and cramps.
Swelling at the site of injuries and sometime redness also appears.
Tenderness.
No movement and numbness.

Question 2.
What are the principles of First Aid?
Answer:
The basic principles of First aid are as follows:

Do first thing fast and quickly, quietly and without panic.
Guard against a treat shock by moving the causality as little as possible.
Do not attempt too much.
Reassure the causality and those around in order to reduce tension.
Give artificial respiration if required.
Try to stop bleeding.
Do not allow people around patient as fresh air is required.

Question 3.
How would you give First aid for the sprain?
Answer:
There are few steps for prevention of sprains:

Sprain is firstly treated as ‘PRICE’, where ‘P’ mean ‘protection’ ‘R’ stands for ‘Rest’, ‘I’ stands for ‘Ice application’, ‘C’ stands for ‘Compresion’ and E stands for ‘Elevation’. Rest the sprained area. If necessary, use sling for an arm injury or crutches for a leg or foot injury. Apply ice on an injured part for 20 minutes every horn. Never put ice directly against skin or it may damage the skin.
Give comfortable position to the patient.
Provide support to the injured part.
Immobilize and elevate the injured part.
Cold compression is given to reduce swelling.

Question 4.
Enlist various preventive measures of dislocation.
Answer:
1. Reduction:
During this process, the doctor may try some gentle movements around the affected joint to help the bones back into position. In case of severe pain local anaesthetic procedures are adopted.

Question 5.
Differentiate between fracture and dislocation.
Answer:
Fracture:
A fracture is a break in the continuity of bone. Fracture occurs when the bone is subjected to stress greater than it can absorb. Fracture can be caused by a direct blow, force, sudden twisting motion and even extreme muscles contraction. The causes of fracture can be direct force, indirect force, force of muscular action and force of ligament.

Dislocation;
Dislocation is injury to joints where one bone is displaced from another. A dislocation is often accompanied by considerable damage to the surrounding connective tissues. Dislocation occurs as a result of the joint being pushed past its normal range of movement. Common site occurring of dislocation are finger, shoulder, hip joint and patella.

Question 6.
Define Abrasion. Also explain various types of Abrasion.
Answer:
Abrasion:
Abrasion occurs when the outer layer of skin is removed, usually as a result of a scraping action. It may be any grade of severity from a simple scraping away of a layer of skin to very extensive damage. The open wound can contain dirt or gravel, which should be removed to avoid further infection.

Types of Abrasions:
Abrasion is four types:
1. Scratches:
An abrasion by sharp or pointed object, not sharp enough to incise but pointed enough to scratches e.g. pin, tip of knife, finger nail etc. Scratches have length but no significant width.

2. Grazes:
Grazes caused by movement between skin and some rough surface in contact with it. They are commonly seen in road accidents.

3. Pressure abrasion:
Caused by crushing of superficial layers of epidermis and are associated with bruise of surrounding area. In this abrasion movement is slightly and directed inward.

4. Impact abrasion:
Caused by impact with a rough object. For example when a person is knocked down by motor car, a headlamps rim or tread of type may be seen on the skin.

Question 7.
Explain various causes of sports injury.
Answer:
Sports injuries are commonly caused due to overuse, over twisting, over stretching, collision, etc. These injuries can be mild to severe. Most of the injuries are caused due to lack of knowledge. Sports injuries can occur on the play field or while playing due to reasons given ahead:

Question 8.
What are the safety measures for sports injury?
Answer:
There are following points which one should consider for safety:
1. Proper Warming Up:
The most important measure to prevent injuries is to perform warming up exercises prior to any event. This would help to prepare an athlete physiologically and psychologically for the event. Hence, the chances of getting injuries would be less by performing proper warming up exercises.

2. According to the fitness level of an athlete:
Sometimes the injury may cause due to overuse of the muscle, in which there are more chances of wear and tear of muscle tissue. So, it is important that the training load should be according to the fitness level of an athlete.

3. Proper technique:
Faulty methods of training or practicing wrong technique would also lead to injury. So, teacher needs to constantly check whether an athlete is practicing appropriate technique or not. It is important to make correction at an early age.

Question 9.
Briefly explain the term RICE and PRICE.
Answer:
RICE:
The term RICE implies ‘R’ means rest, ‘I’ stands for ‘Ice application’ ‘C’ means ‘compression and ‘E’ represents ‘Elevation.’ The term ‘PRICE’ denotes ‘P’ which means ‘protection’ or ‘prevention’ i.e., prevention is better than cure. Hence, principle of ‘PRICE’ most suitable and applicable in the field of sports.

Question 10.
Write a short note on:
(i) Strain
(ii) Contusion.
Answer:
(i) Strain:
Strain is a disruption of the fibres of a muscle or tendon. Tears or strains occur when a muscle or tendon is over-stretched or when a muscle contracts too quickly. The causes of strain occur while lifting weights, muscles are stretched during sudden jerky motion, landing badly on an ankle or walking or exercising on uneven surface. This type of injury generally causes sprains in knees or ankles,

(ii) Contusion:
A contusion or bruise is bleeding into the soft tissue. It is caused by a direct blow from another person or a direct hit by a blunt object. A bruise can occur to any soft tissue of the body. In contusion capillaries are ruptured and swelling, bleeding and pain appear on the injured part.

Question 11.
Differentiqate between Sprain and Strain.
Answer:
Sprain:
A sprain is a tear of ligament fibres, muscles or te’Jons supporting a joint or it is defined as an injury to the ligament and joint capsule. Sprain occurs when joint is extended beyond its normal range, sudden movement, twisting of the part involving joint.

Strain:
Strain is a disruption of the fibres of a muscle or tendon. Tears or strains occur when a muscle or tendon is over-stretched or when a muscle contracts too quickly. The causes of strain occur while lifting weights, muscles are stretched during sudden jerky motion, landing badly on an ankle or walking or exercising on uneven surface. This type of injury generally causes sprains in knees or ankles.

Five Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
Elaborate the term dislocation with its symptoms and preventive measures.
Answer: Dislocation. Dislocation is injury to joints where one bone is displaced from another. A dislocation is often accompanied by considerable damage to the surrounding connective tissues. Dislocation occurs as a result of the joint being pushed past its normal range of movement. Common site occurring of dislocation are finger, shoulder, hip joint and patella.
Symptoms:

Severe pain in the joint.
Reduction in movement of the joint.
Joint looks deformed.
Swelling appears.

Prevention of Dislocation:
As dislocation occurs immediately restrict the joint for further movement. Further movement of dislocated joint can damage the joint and its surrounding muscles, ligaments, nerves or blood vessels. Apply ice on the injured joint. This can help in reducing swelling by controlling internal bleeding.

After this restrict the joint from moving by using a bandage. For an arm injury, a sling can be used to support the arm. For a leg injury, use padding or broad-fold bandages. To give extra support for an injured shoulder, tie a bandage around the arm. After stopping the joint from moving, send the injured person to hospital.
The dislocation is treated by expert doctors. The management of dislocation is done as following steps:

1. Reduction:
During this process, the doctor may try some gentle movements around the affected joint to help the bones back into position. In case of severe pain local anaesthetic procedures are adopted.

Question 2.
Write a short note on:
1. Abrasion
2. Dislocation.
3. Contusion
Answer:
1. Abrasion:
Abrasion occurs when the outer layer of skin is removed, usually as a result of a scraping action. It may be any grade of severity from a simple scraping away of a layer of skin to very extensive damage. The open wound can contain dirt or gravel, which should be removed to avoid further infection.

2. Contusion:
A contusion or bruise is bleeding into the soft tissue. It is caused by a direct blow from another person or a direct hit by a blunt object. A bruise can occur to any soft tissue of the body. In contusion capillaries are ruptured and swelling, bleeding and pain appear on the injured part.

3. Dislocation:
Dislocation is injury to joints where one bone is displaced from another. A dislocation is often accompanied by considerable damage to the surrounding connective tissues. Dislocation occurs as a result of the joint being pushed past its normal range of movement. Common site occurring of dislocation are finger, shoulder, hip joint and patella.

Question 3.
What do you know about strain? Write its symptoms and treatment
Answer:
Soft tissue injuries occur in sports. These are common injuries which mostly occur on the ground while playing the game. These are as under:

(a) Strain/Tear:
Strain is a disruption of the fibres of a muscle or tendon. Tears or strains occur when a muscle or tendon is overstretched or when a muscle contracts too quickly. The causes of strain occur while lifting weights, muscles are stretched during sudden jerky motion, landing badly on an ankle or walking or exercising on uneven surface. This type of injury generally causes sprains in knees or ankles. There are two types of strains.
1. Acute strain
2. Chronic strain

1. Acute Strain:
An acute strain occurs when a muscle become strained or may even tear or when it stretched usually far or abruptly. Acute strains often occur in the following ways:

Slipping on surface.
Running, jumping or throwing.
Lifting a heavy objects.

2. Chronic Strain:
A chronic strain results from prolonged repetitive movements of a muscles. This may occur during events for example Gymnastics, Tennis, Rowing and Golf etc.
Causes of strain

While lifting weight.
Sudden movement.
When muscles are stretched during sudden jerky motion.

Sign and symptoms:

Sudden pain at the site of injury.
Stifness and cramps. .
Swelling at the site of injuries and sometime redness also appears.
Tenderness.
No movement and numbness.

Preventions and Remedies:

Strain is firstly treated as RICE, where ‘R’ stands for ‘Rest’, ‘I’ stands for ‘Ice Application’, C stands for ‘Compression’ and ‘E’ stands for ‘Elevation’. The first thing is to immobilize or rest the sprained area. If necessary, use sling for an arm injury or crutches for a leg or foot injury. Apply ice on an injured part for atleast 20 minutes after every hour. Never put ice directly against skin or it may damage the skin.
Place the patient in a comfortable position.
Immobilized the injured area.
Steady and support the injured part.
Elevate the injure injured part.
Continue ‘RICE’ for 24 to 48 hours.
Shift the patient to the hospital or consult doctor.

Question 4.
Write about sprain alongwith its symptoms and preventions.
Answer:
Sprain:
A sprain is a tear of ligament fibres, muscles or tendons supporting a joint or it is defined as an injury to the ligament and joint capsule. Sprain occurs when joint is extended beyond its normal range, sudden movement, twisting of the part involving joint. We can grade sprain into three phases:

(i) Ordinary Sprain:
It is mild in nature and little swelling can be seen which has no impact on movements and functions.

(ii) Moderate Sprain: It is moderate, due to swelling and pain it affects the functioning and movements.

(iii) Severe Sprain:
It is pain free sprain as sensory fibres are completely tom up. It has large swelling, loss of functioning generally occurs.

Causes of sprain:
There are few reasons for sprain. They are following:

Sudden movement.
Twisting of the part involving joint.
Over stretch or tear of the ligament supporting that joint.
Sudden fall on over stretched arm or side of the foot

Sign and Symptoms:

Burning, pain, and swelling.
Severe pain during movement.
Discoloration
Tenderness.
Loss of the ability to move.
Redness or red streaks spreading over injured area.

Prevention and Remedies:
There are few steps for prevention of sprains. .

Sprain is firstly treated as ‘PRICE’, where ‘P’ stands for ‘protection’ and ‘R’ stands for ‘Rest’, T stands for ‘Ice application’, ‘C’ stands for ‘Compresion’ and E stands for ‘Elevation’. Rest the sprained area. If necessary, use sling for an arm injury or crutches for a leg or foot injury. Apply ice on an injured part for 20 minutes every hour. Never put ice directly against skin or it may damage the skin.
Give comfortable position to the patient.
Provide support to the injured part.
Immobilize and elevate the injured part.
Cold compression is given to reduce swelling.
Hot formation is applied to absorb the blood collection and reduce discolouration.
Apply firm elastic bandage.

Question 5.
What do you mean about fracture? Write its types.
Answer:
Fracture:
A fracture is a break in the continuity of bone. Fracture occurs when the bone is subjected to stress greater than it can absorb. Fracture can be caused by a direct blow, force, sudden twisting motion and even extreme muscles contraction. The causes of fracture can be direct force, indirect force, force of muscular action and force of ligament. There are ahead types of bone fractures that may occur during playing or due to accident:

1. Closed Fracture/Simple Fracture:
Its simply the break down of bone in two pieces. It does not produce a break in the skin.

2. Open Fracture/Compound Fracture:
It is one in which the skin or mucous membrane wound extends to the fracture bone.

3. Commuted Fracture: A fracture in which bone has splintered into several fragments.

4. Complicated Fracture: A fracture in which the fractured bone fragment is driven into another organs or ligaments such as fracture in throacic bone may affect lungs etc.

5. Green Stick Fracture:
A fracture in which only one side may get broken and the bone then appears to be bent, but not broken. It is most common in children.

6. Hair line Fracture: In this type of fracture the thin hair line crack appears in the bone.

7. Depressed Fracture:
A fracture in which fragments are driven inward. This type of fracture can be seen in flat bones such as skull bones etc.

Signs and Symptoms:
Signs of a fractured bone include one or more of the symptoms which are listed below. Intense pain at the site of the injury that worsens with movement.

Severe pain
Swelling around the injured area.
Bone may protrude through the skin.
Heavy bleeding may occur at the injury site.

Remedies and Prevention:
Fractured bones are generally not life frightening, but they need instant medical care
1. In case of bleeding apply pressure to the wound with a sterile bandage, a clean cloth, or a clean piece of clothing. Even first aid treatment for shock is also required.

2. In case the injured person has symptoms such as dizziness, weakness, pale and clammy skin, shortness of breath, and increased heart rate. The person should lie quietly with the feet elevated about 12 inches.

3. Cover him or her with a blanket to maintain body warmth. After this immobilize the injured area.

4. Do not let the injured move if there is a back or neck injury. Make a splint by folding a piece of cardboard or newspaper or a magazine, then placing it gently under the limb. Carefully tie the splint to the injured area with pieces of cloth.

5. Cold compression to the injured area also minimizes swelling and faster recovery. Make sure to place a cloth between the skin and the ice to prevent the damage of the skin.

6. If an injured person is unresponsive and is facing great difficulty in breathing can be given CPR. Don’t move the person to avoid further injury.

7. Immobilize the injured area. Apply a splint to the area above and below the fracture sites. Padding the splints can help reduce discomfort.

Question 6.
What do you understand by Sports injuries? Tell about the prevention of Sports injuries.
Answer:
A sports injury may be defined as ‘ ‘damage to the tissues of the body that occurs as a result of sport or exercise”. Sports injuries can be classified according to the cause of the injury or the type of tissues damaged.
PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 4 Sport Injuries 3

If we divide injury according to the cause then it can be categorised as under:
1. Direct Injury: A direct injury is caused by an external blow or force.

3. Overuse injury:
Overuse injuries occur when excessive and repetitive force is placed on the bones and other connective tissues of the body.

If injuries are classified according to the damaged tissues then we can classify them as follows:

1. Soft Tissue Injuries:
Soft-tissue injuries are the most common injuries resulting from participation in sport. It occurs to muscles, tendons, ligaments and the skin. These injuries include sprain, strain, contusion, abrasion, laceration and blisters.

2. Hard Tissue Injuries:
Hard tissue injuries include injuries to bones or around joints i.e., fracture and dislocations.
Prevention of Sports Injuries. The Physical Education Programme includes the bodily movement where the risks associated with the injury deemed to be acceptably very high. So, it is the responsibility of all the teachers, worker and trainers of Physical Education Programme to identity those risks and situation where the students are not safe in terms of Physical injuries. The Physical Education teacher should make the sports situations and environment safe for the students.

He should also teach safe practices, self safety and effective management of risks to the students. The concept self safety includes various means and ways which helps an athlete to protect him from the chances of injury while playing. It is to gain proper knowledge about the athletic care and how to minimize chances of injury while taking part in games and sports. So, we can say that self safety is a set of measures, ways and methods to care our body from various hazards while participating in games and sports to improve performance. Safety or athletic care has two aspects:

1. Preventive aspects:
It guides us about the preventive ways of the problems.’i.e. how we should prevent ourselves from injury, accident or other hazards. It guides us about preventive clothing, protective equipment, safety equipment, rest and diet etc.

2. Curative aspects:
It guide us how to cure, manage and give treatment to injury. This includes corrective exercise and rehabilitation programme to manage and recover from the injury.
There are following preventive measures which one should consider for safety:

1. Proper Wanning Up:
The most important measure to prevent injuries is to perform warming up exercises prior to any event. This would help to prepare an athlete physiologically and psychologically for the event. Hence, the chances of getting injuries would be less by performing proper warming up exercises.

4. After complete recovery from an injury:
Sometimes athletes start practicing after incomplete recovery from the previous injury, this would lead to further complications and chances of injuries increase in this condition. Hence, an athlete must participate after the complete recovery to avoid further chances of injuries.

5. Safety of equipment:
The most important aspect in the teaching of skill to the students of physical education is that the teacher must have relevant knowledge about the group he is going to deal with it a class. The key information regarding the students includes their physical, mental and physiological capacities and capabilities. Teacher needs to constantly check whether the place (field) where they are going to perform the activity is safe or not. The second concern should be the equipment they are going to use should be properly checked prior to an activity. The equipment you are going to use while participating in sports and other activities is key to injuries.

6. Handling dangerous equipment:
The activity which involves the use of dangerous equipment like javelin, shot-put, hockey stick etc., special attention should be given in the placement of students in the field. No one should be allowed to trespass or cross the field during the use of such equipment.

7. Use of protective equipment:
The activities involving chances of physical injury due to bodily or equipment contact must be performed while using protective equipment. The protective equipment such as head guard, gun shield, cup protective, anklet, knee guard, chest guard etc. must be worn while taking part in sports such as boxing, hockey goal keeping and other contact sports.

Hence, it can be concluded from the above facts that the teachers who are managing and conducting the physical training programme must realize the importance of safety measures in terms of equipment.

Question 7.
Elucidate First Aid. Write down principles of First Aid.
Answer:
“First aid is the immediate treatment given to the victim of sudden illness before medical help is made available”. It is applied to prevent further injury, reduce pain experienced by the patient, and shock from the injury. The most important basic concept in first aid is to stop bleeding, restore adequate breathing and treat the patient from shock.

Principles of First Aid
The basic principles of First aid are as follows:

Do first thing fast and quickly, quietly and without panic.
Guard against a treat shock by moving the causality as little as possible.
Do not attempt too much.
Reassure the causality and those around in order to reduce tension.
Give artificial respiration if required.
Try to stop bleeding. .
Do not allow people around patient as fresh air is required.
Do not change or remove clothes unnecessarily.
Arrange immediate vehicle or ambulance to take patient to the hospital.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Book Solutions Chapter 4 Sport Injuries Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Fitness

September 21, 2024September 20, 2024 by Prasanna

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physical Education Chapter 1 Physical Fitness

Physical Education Guide for Class 12 PSEB Physical Fitness Textbook Questions and Answers

One Mark Question-Answers

Question 1.
How many types of strength are there? Name them.
Answer:
There are two types of strength:

Dynamic strength
Static strength.

Question 2.
How many components of Physical fitness are there? Name them.
Answer:

Strength
Endurance
Speed
Flexibility
Agibity
Coordinaiton ability

Question 3.
Name short term races.
Answer:
100mt., 200 mt., 400 mt., 4 x 100 m Relay, 4 x 200 mt. Relay, 110 mt hurdle, 100 mt hurdle.

Question 4.
Which type of flexibility is more Active flexibility or Passive flexibility?
Answer:
Passive flexibility is more than active flexibility.

Two Marks Question-Answers

Question 5.
What is medium term endurance?
Answer:
It can be required for such activities which lasts from 2 to 10 min. Middle term endurance depends on muscle endurance and speed endurance Middle distance races are the example of the middle term endurance (800 mt., 1500 m) etc.

Question 6.
What do you know about long term endurance?
Answer:
It depends upon the aerobic energy system. Long term endurance can be developed for such an event which lasts for 10 min or more. Marathon, 5000 m and 10,000 m races are the examples of the long term endurance.

Question 7.
What do you know about passive flexibility?
Answer:
It is the ability to perform extension movements around joints with wider range and some external helps. For example, stretching exercise with the help of a partner. This flexibility is more than active flexibility.

Three Marks Question-Answers

Question 8.
What are the different types of Endurance? Explain each of them in detail.
Answer:
As per the requirements following are the categories of endurance
1. As per the Nature of the Activity:
(a) Basic Endurance:
Basic endurance mainly depends upon aerobic endurance. It is done in slow pace where all the muscle groups of the body are involved in a particular movement. Running, jogging, walking and swimming are the examples of basic endurance.

(b) General Endurance:
It depends upon both aerobic and anaerobic activities. It, is done in both slow and fast pace activities. This enables sportsperson to work for longer duration without any tiredness.

(c) Specific Endurance:
Specific endurance can be differ from sports to sports. Every sport has their own intensity. For example, marathon runners have to run long hours beside boxers have to complete their bout in 3 minute round.

2. As per the Duration of the Activity:
(a) Short Term Duration:
Exercises for short distance can be fixed with the rest interval of short duration. It lasts upto 2 minutes and also called anaerobic activities. Short term endurance is required to resist fatigue in sports activities such as sprints and middle distance races.

(b) Middle Term Endurance:
It can be required for such activities which lasts from 2 to 10 min. Middle term endurance depends on muscle endurance and speed endurance Middle distance races are the example of the middle term endurance (800 mt., 1500 m) etc.

(c) Long Term Endurance:
It depends upon the aerobic energy system. Long term endurance can be developed for such an event which lasts for 10 min or more. Marathon, 5000 m and 10,000 m races are the examples of the long term endurance.

Question 9.
Write a note on each of the following:
(i) speed
(ii) flexibility
(iii) co-ordinative ability.
Answer:
(i) Speed:
Speed is maximum rate at which a person is able to move his body over a specific distance. We can say that speed is the ability to move from one place to another in the shortest possible time. This ability is mainly hereditary in nature. That is why we can improve speed after rigorous training upto 20% only. It is also said that sprinters are bom not made.

Types of Speed:
1. Reaction Speed: It is the ability to give a quick reaction on a signal. The sportsperson respond against the situation demand.

2. Acceleration Speed:
It is the ability to achieve maximum speed from stationary position. We can see it in sprints. Indirectly .this ability depends on the other factors like explosive strength, technique and flexibility.

3. Movement Speed:
It is the ability to do maximum movement in minimum time. These can be seen in team games, combative sports, racket sports, throws and gymnastics etc.

4. Locomotor Ability:
This is the ability to maintain the speed after accelerated maximally. This can be seen in few events such as short distance races, i.e. 100 m, 200 m and 400 m etc.

5. Speed Endurance:
It is the ability to maintain near maximal speed for a longer duration.

(ii) Flexibility:
Flexibility is the range of movement possible around a joint. In general terms, flexibility has been defined as the range of motion around a joint and its surrounding muscles during passive movements.

Types of Flexibility:
1. Static Flexibility:
It is the ability to extend various joints in a stationary position.
(a) Passive Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform extension movements around joints with wider range and some external helps. For example, stretching exercise with the ‘ help of a partner. This flexibility is more than active flexibility.

(b) Active Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform flexibility or extension movements with larger amplitude without any external help or a partner. For example, swinging of legs.

2. Dynamic Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform extension movements around joints with greater amplitude when the body is in motion. Dynamic flexibility is more specific to sports to sports movements. For example, running and somersault in gymanastics or diving in swimming etc.

(iii) Coordination Ability:
Coordination Ability is the ability to perform smooth and accurate motor task, often involving the use of the sense organs and series of correlated muscular contraction that affect a range of joint and therefore relative limb and body position. It depends on the neuro-muscular coordination of the body.

Types of Coordination Ability:
There are mainly seven types of coordinative abilities considered in sports. These are as follows:
1. Orientation Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to analyze and change his body position and its parts in time and space in relation to performance required. For example, gymnast changes his body position as per the requirements of sports performance and basket ball player changes his position from offense to defence as the ball possession goes to opponent.

2. Coupling Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to systematically and meaningfully combine the movement of different body parts for successful performance of sports movement. For example, during spiking in volleyball, the player jumps and hits the ball.

3. Differentiation Ability:
It is the ability which enables the sportsman to separate the different body position and its parts during execution of motor action with high accuracy and movement economy. For example, in volley ball when player jumps for spiking, but drops ball according to the situation.

4. Reaction Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to respond quickly to a given signal and perform the movement in well directed manner. For example, in 100 m sprint when an athlete gets the signal he reacts quickly and performs the movement in desired direction.

5. Balance Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to maintain the dynamic condition. For example, in 400 m race, runner should run in his own lane.

6. Rhythm Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to understand the rhythm of movement and to execute the movement with required rhythm. For example, taking lay-up shot in basketball.

7. Adaptation Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to bring about an effective change in the movement according to anticipated change in the situation. For example, adaptation of scoop to the hitting a ball in hockey.

Five Marks Question-Answers

Question 10.
What do you know about the importance of Physical fitness? Explain in detail.
Answer:
People who are physically fit are able to enjoy their life to the fullest. In today’s scenario of technological development people hardly spend time for their physical fitness. Now, question arises why it is important to be physically fit. The answer lies in the following points:

1. Improves Overall Health:
Physically fit persons possess numerous health advantages such as respiratory, cardiovascular health and overall functioning of the body remain in active state. This helps, in reducing the chances of type 2 diabetes, heart diseases, reduces risk of some cancer and lastly helps in maintaining good health and wellness.

2. Weight Management:
As we all know that the person with over weight or obese people are more prone to health related problems such as high BP, Ghotestrol level, diabetes etc. So, people who are living active lifestyle and physically fit are less likely to face these problems as they are able to control and manage their optimum weight with the help of regular exercise and stay fit.

3. Importance as a stress management:
Through the physical fitness and wellness programme, an individual become capable of managing stress, releiving stress and easily distracted from the daily stresses. Hence, this help in staying active and balanced in any stage of life. So, in order to maintain relaxed state of mind, a person should be physically fit.

4. Reduced risk of injuries:
Physical fitness prevents the chances of injuries in later stage. The reason for the same could be the increased muscle strength, bone density, flexibility and stability. It reduces the chances of injuries especially, as a person get older e.g. strong bones mean less likely to suffer bone injuries as later age.

5. Increases life expectancy:
Regular exercise and physical acitivity reduces the chances of health related diseases, which increases life expectancy and reduce the risk of premature mortality. It has been observed that people who are more active tend to be healtheir and tend to live longer.

6. Proper growth and development:
Through fitness and wellness programme children tend to grow and develop better. They are able to attain good shape, height, structure and optimum weight with the help of their physical fitness programme. So, physically fit person are in well balanced state of their physical structure as well.

7. Improves work efficiency:
The person who are physically fit are tend to perform well in every sphere of life such as work place, family peer group etc. Due to their active and balance state of body and mind their output at work place is more and they tend to enjoy social group with more zeal and excitement. Hence, helps in enjoying their life to the fullest.

Hence, it can be concluded that physical fitness is important for the ‘‘Sound mind in a sound body”. To enjoy at every stage of life.

Question 11.
Write the meaning and definition of Physical fitness.
Answer:
Physical fitness is one of the basic requirements of life. It is the ability to carry out our daily tasks without undue fatigue. It is also refer to balanced state of psychological, physiological or anatomical aspects of the person. The concept of physical fitness, in the field of physical education and sports, means the capability of an individual to meet the varied physical and physiological demands made by a sporting activity, without reducing the person to an excessively fatigued state. Such a state would be one in which individual can no longer perform the skills of the activity accurately and successfully.

It is necessary for every individual to be physically fit to perform their daily work with ease or without undue fatigue and to take part in various activities effectively. Everyone should be fit enough through participation in physical activities to develop the different components related to physical fitness.

1. According to Clarke:
“Physical fitness is the ability to carry out daily task with vigour and alertness without undue fatigue and ample energy to enjoy leisure time pursuits and to meet unforeseen emergencies.”

2. According to Bucher and Prentice:
“Physical fitness is organic development, muscular strength and stamina. Physical fitness implies efficient performance in exercises.”

3. According to Thomas: “Physical fitness is the total fundamental capacity of an individual to perform a given task”.

4. According to Mathews: “Physical fitness is the capacity of an individual to perform given physical tasks involving muscular effort”.

5. According to William: “Physical fitness is the capacity of an individual to perform physical work”.

6. According to Hubert Dhanaraj: “Physical fitness refers to the ability of the body to tolerate stress in all its kinds and maintain manifestations”.

7. According David R. Lamb: “Physical fitness is the capacity to meet the present and potential physical challenges of life with success.”

8. According to Web Encyclopaedia: ‘‘It is the ability of a person to do daily routine work without fatigue; moreover to participate in playful activity and still reserves enough capacity to meet any emergency.”

Hence, it is important for everyone to stay fit and healthy to perform his daily routine work effectively, to enjoy his life to fullest.

Question 12.
Explain the factors affecting Physical fitness in detail.
Answer:
There are enormous factors which affects physical fitness in certain ways. Due to inactivity, both short term and long term physical fitness get affected in number of ways. These factors which affect physical fitness are as below:
1. Anatomical Structure:
Anatomical/body structure of every individual is different or they have different shape and sizes. Inappropriate shape and size always hinder in physical performance. Sometimes, genetic impaired organ limits the physical performance of an individual, e.g. a person with smaller lower limbs have more balance as compare to vice-versa.

2. Physiological Structure:
Our all internal system like respiratory system, circulatory system, muscular system and other body systems must work efficiently. Any malfunctioning in systems can affect the physical performance of an individual Example would be problem in breathing or heart diseases etc. may affect the endurance capacity of a person. Hence, for the optimal physical fitness an individual must be physiologically fit also.

3. Psychological Factor:
There are so many psychological disorders which has affect on physical performance e.g. stress, tension, anxiety etc. which are big barriers in performance. Mentally strong and stress free individual can be fit for sports. Stress and tension always limits the physical fitness of a person and hence, affects the performance.

4. Heredity and Environment:
Both, heredity and environment affects physical fitness of an individual. Heredity and environment interacts to produce their effects. This means that the way genes act depends on the environment in which they act. e.g. if any person is a good sportsman, the child tend to have some traits of physical domain. Similarly, environmental variables also effects an individual e.g. difference of height in Japanese and AmericAnswer:

5. Good Posture:
Postural deformities always creates hinderance in physical fitness, for example muscle imbalance, pain, nutrition deficiency, lordosis, scoliosis, round shoulder, knock knees etc. can affect physical fitness of a person, e.g. A person with flat feet would not be able to perform better in events demanding speed.

6. Diet:
Diet plays a major role in physical performance and it is required to maintain physical fitness level. Right amount of calories and nutrition will help athlete to perform their best. Without adequate carbohydrate and fluid, an athlete gets tired very easily and quickly. Protein is needed to rebuild muscles. Without carbohydrates, protein, vitamins athlete will not perform well and it also decreases physical fitness.

7. Life Style:
A person who follow good life style are more fit and perform better in physical performance. Life style does not mean luxuries living; it means living with good habits. An individual who is habitual of smoking, liquor, drug etc. cannot perform well on these components of physical fitness. It affects physical fitness and overall health of a person.

8. Climate:
Different climatic conditions always affects the physical fitness of a person. There are different climatic conditions like winter, summer, humid etc. which influence physical fitness. For better physical performance one must trained themselves in different climate conditions. For example if an individual belongs to the hot and humid area and they have to compete in cold area then, it affects their physical performance. To avoid these barriers one must practice in different climates.

9. Inactivity:
Lack of physical activity leads individual towards sedentary life style which also creates malfunctioning in body system. Physical activity is the term used to describe any kind of everyday activity where body’s movement bums calories. Example would be walking, running, cycling, swimming, sweeping or other household work. Due to inactivity body system gets weaken and other health issues arises.

10. Injury:
Injuries are part of sports. Lack of injury management can decrease performance as well as it affects psychologically on athletes’ mind. Severe or long term injuries often affecting more mentally then physically. Long term injuries leads to inactivity which ultimately affects the physical fitness of a person.

11. Age:
Age differences always affects physical fitness of an individual. As we cannot compare the physical efficiency of an adult with younger ones. In the same way when we grow older, our muscle mass decreases and body fat increases which really affects physical fitness.

12. Gender:
Gender plays a major role in physical performance. Both male and female have huge structural differences. For example female bodies are less muscular, but their joints are more flexible, which gives them greater range of motion and they have an advantage in sports such as gymnastics. Men have larger skeletal muscles as well as larger heart, which generate more power, strength, speed and endurance.

13. Healthy environment:
A healthy environment at school, home or at playfield is helpful in better physical health and fitness. It also encourages athlete to get best physical performance. A healthy environment and good participation is essential for proper rowth and development which plays a key role in physical fitness.

PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Guide Physical Fitness Important Questions and Answers

One Mark Question-Answers

Question 1.
Enlist any two types of speed.
Answer:
Reaction Speed, Acceleration Speed.

Question 2.
In how many types endurance can be divided?
Answer:
Two types.

Question 3.
Give various types of strength.
Answer:
(i) Dynamic Strength
(ii) Static Strength.

Question 4.
At what age weight training programme should be started?
Answer:
At the age of 18 years.

Question 5.
Enlist any two importance of physical fitness.
Answer:
(i) Improves overall health.
(ii) Weight management.

Question 6.
Give various components of physical fitness.
Answer:
Strength, Speed, Flexibility, Agility, Balance and Coordination ability.

Question 7.
What is the other name for dynamic strength?
Answer:
Isotonic Strength.

Question 8.
Give substitute name for static strength.
Answer:
Isometric Strength.

Question 9.
What is balance?
Answer:
The ability to control the body position, either stationary or in movement is termed as balance.

Question 10.
Name various types of flexibility.
Answer:
(i) Static flexibility.
(ii) Dynamic flexibility.

Question 11.
Enlist any two coordination abilities.
Answer:
(i) Orientation ability
(ii) Coupling Ability

Question 12.
Give any two methods for developing agility.
Answer:

Shuttle Run
Speed Ladder Agility Drill.

Question 13.
How does William express his views about physical fitness?
Answer:
According to William, “Physical fitness is the capacity of an individual to perform physical work”.

Question 14.
What is strength?
Answer:
The extent to which muscles can exert force by contracting against resistance is known to be strength. In simple words its an ability to work against resistance.

Question 15.
Define strength in the words of Muller.
Answer:
According to Muller,” Strength may be defined as “The force, a muscle can exert against a resistance in one maximal effort”. It is measured in units of pounds or kilograms.”

Question 16.
How does Mathews define strength?
Answer:
According to Mathews,” Muscular Strength is the force that a muscle or group of muscles can exert against a resistance in one maximum effort.”

Question 17.
What is static strength?
Answer:
It is the ability of muscles to act against resistance without changing or shortening the length, e.g. Pushing against wall in which muscles develops tension without changing its length.

Question 18.
Tell about explosive strength.
Answer:
It is the combination of speed and strength. It is the ability to overcome resistance with high speed. Explosive strength can be seen in sprint races, weight lifting, hammer throw, long jump and high jump etc.

Question 19.
Explain about strength endurance.
Answer:
It is the combination of strength and endurance. It is the ability to overcome resistance for a longer duration. Long distance races, swimming and cycling are the examples of strength endurance.

Question 20.
Whether the muscle changes its length in static strength?
Answer:
No.

Question 21.
What is basic endurance?
Answer:
Basic endurance mainly depends upon aerobic endurance. It is done in slow pace where all the muscle groups of the body are involved in a particular movement. Running, jogging, walking and swimming are the examples of basic endurance.

Question 22.
What is general endurance?
Answer:
It depends upon both aerobic and anaerobic activities. It is done in both slow and fast pace activities. This enables sportsperson to work for longer duration without any tiredness.

Question 23.
General endurance is part of which type of endurance.
Answer:
Nature of the activity.

Question 24.
If a boxer has to complete for three minutes boxing round, then which type of endurance is required?
Answer:
Specific endurance.

Question 25.
What is the meaning of aerobic?
Answer:
Aerobic means when the oxygen demand is meet during exercise and practice.

Question 26.
Explain middle term endurance in your own words.
Answer:
It can be required for such activities which lasts from 2 to 10 min. Middle term endurance depends on muscle endurance and speed endurance Middle distance races are the example of the middle term endurance (800 m, 1500 m) etc.

Question 27.
In which type of races short term endurance is required?
Answer:
100 mt., 200 mt., 400 mt. etc.

Question 28.
The activities which that end from 2 minutes 10 minutes, what type of endurance is required for these activities.
Answer:
Middle term endurance.

Question 29.
Which type of endurance is required in 5000 and 10000 metre races?
Answer:
Long term endurance.

Question 30.
Middle term of endurance is part of which types of endurance?
Answer:
Endurance on the basis of duration of activity.

Question 31.
What percentage of speed can be improved after stermous training?
Answer:
Upto 20%.

Question 32.
What do you mean by locomoter ability?
Answer:
This is the ability to maintain the speed after accelerated maximally. This can be seen in few events such as short distance races, i.e. 100 m, 200 m and 400 m etc.

Question 33.
What is speed endurance?
Answer:
It is the ability to maintain near maximal speed for a longer duration.

Question 34.
Which component of physical fitness is improved with shuttle run, polymetric jump and tuck jumps.
Answer:
Agility.

Question 35.
What is adaptation ability?
Answer:
It is the ability of an individual to bring about an effective change in the movement according to anticipated change in the situation. For example, adaptation of scoop to the hitting a ball in hockey.

Two Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
Define physical fitness.
Answer:
According to Bucher and Prentice, “Physical fitness is organic development, muscular strength and stamina. Physical fitness implies efficient performance in exercises.”

Question 2.
Give any two importance of physical fitness.
Answer:
1. Improves Overall Health:
Physically fit persons possess numerous health advantages such as respiratory, cardiovascular health and overall functioning of the body remain in active state. This helps in reducing the chances of type 2 diabetes, heart diseases, reduces risk of some cancer and lastly helps in maintaining good health and wellness.

2. Weight Management:
As we all know that the person with over weight or obese people are more prone to health related problems such as high BP, Chotestrol level, diabetes etc. So, people who are living active lifestyle and physically fit are less likely to face these problems as they are able to control and manage their optimum weight with the help of regular exercise and stay fit.

Question 3.
Define Endurance.
Answer:
According to Barrow and McGee, “Endurance is the result of a physiological capacity of the individual to sustain movement over a period of time”.

Question 4.
What do you mean by explosive strength?
Answer:
It is the combination of speed and strength. It is the ability to overcome resistance with high speed. Explosive strength can be seen in sprint races, weight lifting, hammer throw, long jump and high jump etc.

Question 5.
Enlist various factors affecting physical fitness.
Answer:

Anatomical Structure
Physiological Structure
Psychological Factor
Heredity and Environment

Question 6.
Define Speed.
Answer:
According to Johnson and Nelson, “speed is the rate at which a person can propel his body or parts of his body through space”.

Question 7.
What do you mean by strength endurance?
Answer:
It is the combination of strength and endurance. It is the ability to overcome resistance for a longer duration. Long distance races, swimming and cycling are the examples of strength endurance.

Question 8.
Enlist two factors affecting physical fitness.
Answer:
Psychological Factor:
There are so many psychological disorders which has affect on physical performance e.g. stress, tension, anxiety etc. which are big barriers in performance. Mentally strong and stress free individual can be fit for sports. Stress and tension always limits the physical fitness of a person and hence, affects the performance.

Diet:
Diet plays a major role in physical performance and it is required to maintain physical fitness level. Right amount of calories and nutrition will help athlete to perform their best. Without adequate carbohydrate and fluid, an athlete gets tired very easily and quickly. Protein is needed to rebuild muscles. Without carbohydrates, protein, vitamins athlete will not perform well and it also decreases physical fitness.

Question 9.
What points should be taken into consideration while perparing fitness programme?
Answer:
Age:
Age differences always affects physical fitness of an individual. As we cannot compare the physical efficiency of an adult with younger ones. In the same way when we grow older, our muscle mass decreases and body fat increases which really affects physical fitness.

Gender:
Gender plays a major role in physical performance. Both male and female have huge structural differences. For example female bodies are less muscular, but their joints are more flexible, which gives them greater range of motion and they have an advantage in sports such as gymnastics. Men have larger skeletal muscles as well as larger heart, which generate more power, strength, speed and endurance.

Question 10.
What is the meaning of strength endurance?
Answer:
It is the combination of strength and endurance. It is the ability to overcome resistance for a longer duration. Long distance races, swimming and cycling are the examples of strength endurance.

Question 11.
What do you understand by speed and strength?
Answer:
Speed: Speed is maximum rate at which a person is able to move his body over a specific distance.
Strength. It is defined as the force exerted by muscles during a single maximal muscular contraction.

Question 12.
What are the factors affecting physical fitness?
Answer:
1. Anatomical Structure:
Anatomical/body structure of every individual is different or they have different shape and sizes. Inappropriate shape and size always hinder in physical performance. Sometimes, genetic impaired organ limits the physical performance of an individual, e.g. a person with smaller lower limbs have more balance as compare to vice-versa.

2. Psychological Factor:
There are so many psychological disorders which has affect on physical performance e.g. stress, tension, anxiety etc. which are big barriers in performance. Mentally strong and stress free individual can be fit for sports. Stress and tension always limits the physical fitness of a person and hence, affects the performance.

Question 13.
Define reaction speed.
Answer:
It is the ability to give a quick reaction on a signal. The sportsperson respond against the situation demand.

Question 14.
What is agility?
Answer:
The ability to perform a series of explosive movements in rapid succession in opposing directions (zig-zag running shuttle run or cutting movement). In other words, it can be termed as how quickly a person respond to a given stimulus.

Question 15.
Give any one definition of physical fitness.
Answer:
According David R. Lamb, “Physical fitness is the capacity to meet the present and potential physical challenges of life with success.”

Question 16.
Enlist any two elements of physical fitness.
Answer:
Strength:
The extent to which muscles can exert force by contracting against resistance is known to be strength. In simple words its and ability to work against resistance.

Agility: It is the ability to move and change direction and position of the body quickly and effectively while under control.

Question 17.
Elaborate the term anatomical structure.
Answer:
Anatomical/body structure of every individual is different or they have different shape and sizes. Inappropriate shape and size always hinder in physical performance. Sometimes, genetic impaired organ limits the physical performance of an individual, e.g. a person with smaller lower limbs have more balance as compare to vice-versa.

Question 18.
Does injuries affects physical fitness and why?
Answer:
Yes, because injuries are part of sports. Lack of injury management can decrease performance as well as it affects psychologically on athletes’ mind. Severe or long term injuries often affecting more mentally then physically. Long term injuries leads to inactivity which ultimately affects the physical fitness of a person.

Question 19.
How does healthy environment affects the physical fitness of a person?
Answer:
A healthy environment at school, home or at playfield is helpful in better physical health and fitness. It also encourages athlete to get best physical performance. A healthy environment and good participation is essential for proper growth and development which plays a key role in physical fitness.

Question 20.
Explain about general endurance and middle term endurance.
Answer:
General Endurance:
It depends upon both aerobic and anaerobic activities. It is done in both slow and fast pace activities. This enables sportsperson to work for longer duration without any tiredness.

Middle Term Endurance:
It can be required for such activities which lasts from 2 to 10 min. Middle term endurance depends on muscle endurance and speed endurance Middle distance races are the example of the middle term endurance (800 m, 1500 m) etc.

Question 21.
What is the difference between reaction speed and movement speed?
Answer:
Reaction Speed:
It is the ability to give a quick reaction on a signal. The sportsperson respond against the situation demand.

Movement Speed:
It is the ability to do maximum movement in minimum time. These can be seen in team games, combative sports, racket sports, throws and gymnastics etc.

Question 22.
Write in your own words about locomotor speed and accleration speed.
Answer:
Locomotor speed:
This is the ability to maintain the speed after accelerated maximally. This can be seen in few events such as short distance races, i.e. 100 m, 200 m and 400 m etc.

Acceleration Speed:
It is the ability to achieve maximum speed from stationary position. We can see it in sprints. Indirectly ,this ability depends on the other factors like explosive strength, technique and flexibility.

Three Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate between Isotonic and Isometric strength.
Answer:
Dynamic Strength or Isotonic Strength:
When the contraction results in the change of muscles length and the pressure remains same throughout the contraction, it can be called dynamic strength. For example, involving movement at more than one joint i.e. push ups, pull-ups, barbell press, squats, lunges and dead lifts etc. Dynamic strength can also be divided in three parts:

Static strength or Isometric strength:
It is the ability of muscles to act against resistance without changing or shortening the length, e.g. Pushing against wall in which muscles develops tension without changing its length.

Question 2.
How would you classify endurance on the basis of nature of activity?
Answer:
1. Basic Endurance:
Basic endurance mainly depends upon aerobic endurance. It is done in slow pace where all the muscle groups of the body are involved in a particular movement. Running, jogging, walking and swimming are the examples of basic endurance.

2. General Endurance:
It depends upon both aerobic and anaerobic activities. It is done in both slow and fast pace activities. This enables sportsperson to work for longer duration without any tiredness.

3. Specific Endurance:
Specific endurance can be differ from sports to sports. Every sport has their own intensity. For example, marathon runners have to run long hours beside boxers have to complete their bout in 3 minute round.

Question 3.
Elucidate the term short term endurance and middle term endurance.
Answer:
1. Short Term Endurance:
Exercises for short distance can be fixed with the rest interval of short duration. It lasts upto 2 minutes and also called anaerobic activities. Short term endurance is required to resist fatigue in sports activities such as sprints and middle distance races.

2. Middle Term Endurance:
It can be required for such activities which lasts from 2 to 10 min. Middle term endurance depends on muscle endurance and speed endurance Middle distance races are the example of the middle term endurance (800 m, 1500 m) etc.

Question 4.
What do you know about coordination ability?
Answer:
Coordination ability is the ability to perform smooth and accurate motor task, often involving the use of the sense organs and series of correlated muscular contraction that affect a range of joint and therefore relative limb and body position. It depends on the neuro¬muscular coordination of the body. The various elements of coordinative abilities are orientation ability, coupling, ability differentiation ability, reaction ability, balance ability, rhythm, ability and adaptation ability.

Question 5.
Differentiate between agility and speed.
Answer:
Speed is maximum rate at which a person is able to move his body over a specific distance. We can say that speed is the ability to move from one place to another in the shortest possible time.

Agility is the ability to move and change direction and position of the body quickly and effectively while under control. It requires quick reflexes, coordination, balance, speed, and correct response to the changing situation.

Question 6.
Briefly explain about the types of strength.
Answer:
As per the requirements in different sports settings the following classifications of the strength can be given:
1. Dynamic strength or isotonic strength
2. Static strength or isometric strength

1. Dynamic Strength or Isotonic Strength:
When the contraction results in the change of muscles length and the pressure remains same throughout the contraction, it can be called dynamic strength. For example, involving movement at more than one joint i.e. push ups, pull- ups, barbell press, squats, lunges and dead lifts etc. Dynamic strength can also be divided in three parts:

(a) Maximum Strength:
It is the greatest strength that can be achieved voluntarily against a resistance. We can also define maximum strength as the amount of muscuo skeletal force a person can generate with all-out efforts..

(b) Explosive Strength:
It is the combination of speed and strength. It is the ability to overcome resistance with high speed. Explosive strength can be seen in sprint races, weight lifting, hammer throw, long jump and high jump etc.

(c) Strength endurance:
It is the combination of strength and endurance. It is the ability to overcome resistance for a longer duration. Long distance races, swimming and cycling are the examples of strength endurance.

2. Static strength or Isometric strength:
It is the ability of muscles to act against resistance without changing or shortening the length, e.g. Pushing against wall in which muscles develops tension without changing its length.

Question 7.
What do you know about flexibility? Give its types also.
Answer:
Flexibility is the range of movement possible around a joint. In general terms, flexibility has been defined as the range of motion around a joint and its surrounding muscles during passive movements.

Types of Flexibility
1. Static Flexibility: It is the ability to extend various joints in a stationary position.
(a) Passive Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform extension movements around joints with wider range and some external helps. For example, stretching exercise with the help of a partner.

(b) Active Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform flexibility or extension movements with larger amplitude without any external help or a partner. For example, swinging of legs.

Question 8.
Enlist various types of speed.
Answer:
1. Reaction Speed: It is the ability to give a quick reaction on a signal. The sportsperson respond against the situation demand.

2. Acceleration Speed:
It is the ability to achieve maximum speed from stationary position. We can see it in sprints. Indirectly ,this ability depends on the other factors like explosive strength, technique and flexibility.

3. Movement Speed:
It is the ability to do maximum movement in minimum time. These can be seen in team games, combative sports, racket sports, throws and gymnastics etc.

4. Locomotor Ability:
This is the ability to maintain the speed after accelerated maximally. This can be seen in few events only i.e. 100 m, 200 m and 400 m etc.

5. Speed Endurance: It is the ability to maintain near maximal speed for a longer duration.

Question 9.
Highlight any three factors affecting physical fitness.
Answer:
1. Life Style:
A person who follow good life style are more fit and perform better in physical performance. Life style does not mean luxuries living; it means living with good habits. An individual who is habitual of smoking, liquor, drug etc. cannot perform well on these components of physical fitness. It affects physical fitness and overall health of a person.

2. Good Posture:
Postural deformities always creates hindrance in physical fitness, for example muscle imbalance, pain, nutrition deficiency, lordosis, scoliosis, round shoulder, knock knees etc. can affect physical fitness of a person, e.g. A person with flat feet would not be able to perform better in events demanding speed.

3. Diet:
Diet plays a major role in physical performance and it is required to maintain physical fitness level. Right amount of calories and nutrition will help athlete to perform their best. Without adequate carbohydrate and fluid, an athlete gets tired very easily and quickly. Protein is needed to rebuild muscles. Without carbohydrates, protein, vitamins athlete will not perform well and it also decreases physical fitness.

Question 10.
Differentiate between locomotor ability and reaction ability?
Answer:
Reaction Ability.
It is the ability of an individual to respond quickly to a given signal and perform the movement in well directed maimer. For example, in 100 m sprint when an athlete gets the signal he reacts quickly and performs the movement in desired direction.

Locomotor Ability:
This is the ability to maintain the speed after accelerated maximally. This can be seen in few events such as short distance races, i.e. 100 m, 200 m and 400 m etc.

Five Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
Write the basic components of physical fitness strength and speed.
Answer:
Strength is defined as the force exerted by muscles groups during a single maximal muscle contraction. Strength can be developed with the right kind and amount of training.
PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Fitness 1

Types of Strength
As per the requirements in different sports settings the following classifications of the strength can be given:
1. Dynamic strength or isotonic strength
2. Static strength or isometric strength

Speed:
Speed is maximum rate at which a person is able to move his body over a specific distance. We can say that speed is the ability to move from one place to another in the shortest possible time.
PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Fitness 2 According to Barrow and McGee, “speed is the capacity of an individual to perform successive movement of the same pattern at a fast rate”. According to Johnson and Nelson, “speed is the rate at which a person can propel his body or parts of his body through space”.
Speed comprises quick response, acceleration, maximum speed and speed endurance.

Types of Speed
1. Reaction Speed: It is the ability to give a quick reaction on a signal. The sportsperson respond against the situation demand.

3. Movement Speed:
It is the ability to do maximum movement in minimum time. These can be seen in team games, combative sports, racket sports, throws and gymnastics etc.

4. Locomotor Ability:
This is the ability to maintain the speed after accelerated maximally. This can be seen in few events only i.e. 100 m, 200 m and 400 m etc.

5. Speed Endurance: It is thejability to maintain near maximal speed for longer duration.

Question 2.
Explain the importance of physical fitness.
Answer:
People who are physically fit are able to enjoy their life to the fullest. In today’s scenario of technological development people hardly spend time for their physical fitness. Now, question arises why it is important to be physically fit. The answer lies in the following points:

1. Improves Overall Health:
Physically fit persons possess numerous health advantages such as respiratory, cardiovascular health and overall functioning of the body remain in active state. This helps in reducing the chances of type 2 diabetes, heart diseases, reduces risk of some cancer and lastly helps in maintaining good health and wellness.

4. Reduced risk of Injuries:
Physical fitness prevents the chances of injuries in later stage. The reason for the same could be the increased muscle strength, bone density, flexibility and stability. It reduces the chances of injuries especially, as a person get older e.g. strong bones mean less likely to suffer bone injuries as later age.

6. Proper growth and development:
Through fitness and wellness programme children tend to grow and develop better. They are able to attain good shape, height, structure and optimun weight with the help of their physical fitness programme. So, physically fit person are in well balanced state of their physical structure as well.

Hence, it can be concluded that physical fitness is important for the “Sound mind in a sound body”. To enjoy at every stage of life.

Question 3.
Briefly explain the factors affecting physical fitness.
Answer:
There are enormous factors which affects physical fitness in certain ways. Due to inactivity, both short term and long term physical fitness affected in number of ways. These factors which affect physical fitness are as ahead:

1. Anatomical Structure:
Anatomical/body structure of every individual is different or they have different shape and sizes. Inappropriate shape and size always hinder in physical performance. Sometimes, genetic impaired organ limits the physical performance of an individual, e.g. a person with smaller lower limbs have more balance as compare to vice-versa.

2. Physiological Structure:
Our all body system like respiratory system, circulatory system, muscular system and other body systems must work efficiently. Any malfunctioning in systems can affect the physical performance. Example would be problem in breathing or heart diseases etc. Hence, for the optimal physical fitness an individual must be physiological fit also.

10. Injury:
Injuries are part of sports. Lack of injury management can decrease performance as well as it affects psychologically on athletes mind. Severe or long term injuries often affecting more mentally then physically. Long term injuries leads to inactivity which ultimately affects the physical fitness of a person.

13. Healthy environment:
A healthy environment at school, home or at playfield is helpful in better physical health and fitness. It also encourages athlete to get best physical performance. A healthy environment and good participation is essential for proper growth and development which plays a key role in physical fitness.

Question 4.
Explain flexibility alongwith its various types?
Answer:
Flexibility:
Flexibility is the range of movement possible around a joint. In general terms, flexibility has been defined as the range of motion around a joint and its surrounding muscles.

Types of Flexibility:
1. Static Flexibility:
It is the ability to extend various joints in a stationary position.

(а) Passive Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform extension movements around joints with wider range and some external helps. For example, stretching exercise with the help of a partner. This flexibility is more then active flexibility,

(b) Active Flexibility:
It is the ability to perform flexibility or extension movements with larger amplitude without any external help or a partner. For example, swinging of legs.

Question 5.
What do you know about coordination ability? Also explain various types of coordination ability.
Answer:
Coordinative ability is the ability to perform smooth and accurate motor task, often involving the use of the sense organs and series of correlated muscular contraction that affect a range of joint and therefore relative limb and body position. It depends on the neuromuscular coordination of the body.

Types of Coordinative Ability:
There are mainly seven types of coordinative abilities considered in sports. These are as follows:

1. Orientation Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to analyze and change his body position and its parts in time and space in relation to performance required. For example, gymnast changes his body position as per the requirements of sports performance and basket ball player changes his position from offense to defence as the ball possession goes to opponent.

5. Balance Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to maintain the dynamic condition. For example, in 400 m race,, runner should run in his own lane.

6. Rhythm Ability:
It is the ability of an individual to understand the rhythm of movement and to execute the movement with required rhythm. For example, taking lay-up shot in basketball.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Book Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Fitness Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Solutions Chapter 5 Creative Thinking

September 21, 2024September 20, 2024 by Prasanna

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Book Solutions Chapter 5 Creative Thinking Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Welcome Life Chapter 5 Creative Thinking

Welcome Life Guide for Class 10 PSEB Creative Thinking In Text Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Who are the parts of the tree of school?
Answer:
The principal, teachers, clerk, peon, students, management all are parts of the school tree.

Question 2.
How do flowers of school’s trees spread their fragrance in the world?
Answer:
These flowers can spread their fragrance in the whole world by getting a good education, doing individual progress, getting good marks, etc.

Question 3.
Do you irrigate your family tree with love, respect, time, and cooperation?
Yes or No. If yes, tell how …………………
Answer:
Yes, we irrigate our family tree with love, respect, time, and cooperation. We give and take love from the family members. We respect elders and cooperate with the younger ones. We spent time with each other, listen to their problems, to get rid of such problems. We always cooperate with the parents to do their work. It helps in reducing their load of work. Detail of given and taken cooperation to the single-family, joint (maternal/paternal) family.

Sr. No	Name of the family member and relation	Cooperation got from them	Cooperation was given to them
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Note: Do it yourself.

Question 4.
How do you feel when someone else helps you at time of need?
Answer:
It feels great when someone helps me at the time of need and at that time, I also think of helping others when required.

Question 5.
Do you cooperate with the ‘School-Family’?
Yes or No
Answer:
Yes

If yes, give detail: …………………….

Sr. No	Name of the members of the school family	Cooperation was given to them	Cooperation got from them

Answer:
Do it yourself.

Question 6.
Someone helps you, when you need help, how do you feel?
Answer:
It seems great when someone helps us in distress. At this time, a small help is of great importance. We feel great at that time.

For these	How will you cooperate with them	For these	How will you cooperate
Family		Class
Elders		School
Youngsters		Classmates
Society		Needy/with special needs

Answer:
Do it yourself.

Let us enjoy

1. Be a companion to all
Be a companion to all
Empower the needy,
If you’re a man of God.

2. By supporting the powerless,
By supporting the powerless,
You will make their strength
And power double.

3. What you sow is what you reap,
What you sow is what you reap,
Be positive and
Never wish badly on anyone

4. Don’t live a life of selfishness,
Don’t live a life of selfishness,
Nobody will stand with you
In the time of hopelessness.

5. When you live in harmony and togetherness,
When you Jive in harmony and togetherness,
You will always lead a life full of happiness
Nobody will be able to break your spirit of happiness.

6. You’ll never see the face of defeat,
You’ll never see the face of defeat,
When you start.
Finding unity in diversity

7. Good & bad are never at parity,
Good & bad are never at parity,
Helpful people bring to the world,
love and solidarity.

8. First is more powerful than a finger,
First is more powerful than a finger,
While the religions teach the world to be united.

Question 1.
What do these poetic lines tell us?
Answer:
The poetic lines tell us the importance of cooperation that nothing is possible in society without cooperation. If all will not cooperate with, each other, family and society cannot run smoothly. An individual cannot do anything alone. He needs the cooperation of others to do every type of work.

Question 2.
How do we double their impact?
Answer:
If we stand with a weak person, his strength becomes double. It means that the strength of an individual becomes double if we help or cooperate with him in any manner.

Question 3.
What happens if we don’t live in togetherness?
Answer:

If we don’t live together, nothing will come out of anything.
Everyone will do his or her work, will not cooperate with others, and finally, society will not do progress.
Maybe the enemy will attack him alone and he will have to repent later.

Question 4.
Who runs the society?
Answer:
Society runs with cooperation and cooperative families. If there will be no cooperative families, society will not run smoothly.

Question 5.
Who never lost the bet?
Answer:
Those who cooperate with others never lose the bet.

PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Guide Empathy Important Questions and Answers

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. To watch the beauty of the world :
(a) Depends upon the world
(b) Depends upon the perspective of an individual
(c) Depends upon society
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) Depends upon the perspective of an individual.

2. What do we expect from others?
(а) They should respect us
(b) They should accept our friendship.
(c) They must’ be willing to talk to me.
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

3. How can we increase the tree of the family?
(a) By cooperation
(b) By giving respect
(c) By giving time
(d) All of these.
Answer:
(d) All of these.

4. Who is the head of the school?
(a) Management
(b) Principal
(c) H.O.D.
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) Principal

5. Life is incomplete without
(a) Understanding
(b) Greed
(c) Jealousy
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Understanding

6. The meaning of creative nature is …………….
(a) To do something new
(b) To create something special
(c) To do something basic
(d) All of these.
Answer:
(d) All of these.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. A creative mind does ……………….
Answer:
Self-development

2. Life is incomplete without ……………
Answer:
Understanding

3. Society cannot move without …………..
Answer:
Cooperation

4. We must give ……………. and ……………. to elders.
Answer:
respect, time,

5. We keep some …………… from others.
Answer:
expectations

True / False :

1. We must not keep expectations from others.
Answer:
False

2. I want that everyone should respect me.
Answer:
True

3. Teachers motivate the students.
Answer:
True

4. We must keep ourselves away from petty fights.
Answer:
True

5. We don’t like when someone helps us.
Answer:
False

Match the Column :

Column A	Column B
(a) Remain intact	(i) Quality of creating new
(b) Angry	(ii) Mood
(c) Imagination	(iii) To live collectively
(d) Creative thinking	(iv) Scolding
(e) Feeling	(v) Thinking about someone

Answer:

Column A	Column B
(a) Remain intact	(iii) To live collectively
(b) Angry	(iv) Scolding
(c) Imagination	(v) Thinking about someone
(d) Creative thinking	(i) Quality of creating new
(e) Feeling	(ii) Mood

Very Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Watching the world’s beauty depends on what?
Answer:
It depends upon one’s perspective.

Question 2.
When can we find everything good in the world?
Answer:
When we start looking for good, we find everything good in the world.

Question 3.
What type of thinking a man should have?
Answer:
His thinking should be of constructive nature.

Question 4.
What should we do so that we should like the whole world?
Answer:
We must try to find happiness and beauty in everything.

Question 5.
Tell one expectation which I keep with others?
Answer:
We want that they should accept what we say and must not say no to us.

Question 6.
Do you live up to the expectations of others?
Answer:
Yes, whenever they require it, we help them.

Question 7.
How can we get better in the world?
Answer:
If we fulfill the expectations of others, we will definitely get better in the world.

Question 8.
What should we look for in others?
Answer:
We should look for good qualities in others.

Question 9.
How can a family do progress?
Answer:
By giving time, cooperation, and love to family members, the family can do progress.

Question 10.
How can we keep elders happy?
Answer:
By spending time with them and by giving respect, we can keep our elders happy.

Question 11.
Without what life is incomplete?
Answer:
Life is incomplete without understanding.

Question 12.
How did Mangat get hurt?
Answer:
Mangat got hurt in a road accident.

Question 13.
What is meant by creative thinking?
Answer:
The meaning of creative thinking is to have a curiosity to create something new or special.

Question 14.
When can a creative mind get social respect?
Answer:
When he creates something new and does self-progress he gets social respect.

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
How the world looks good?
Answer:
This world is quite beautiful and it depends upon one’s perspective that how he looks at this beauty. If we search for good things in the world, we will definitely find them but if we search for bad, it will come automatically to us. That’s why, if we do have good, we need to find beauty and happiness in everything. Then everything will look good.

Question 2.
What a student expects from others?
Answer:

He expects that others should respect him.
He wants that others must wish to speak to him.
He wants that his friends should obey him.
He wants to get good marks.
He wants to move around with his friends.

Question 3.
What are the expectations in our lives?
Answer:
Expectations are of great role in our lives. We keep many expectations from others and also expect them to fulfill those expectations. If they are not fulfilling these expectations, our relationship is in danger. So, we must understand that if we want to get our expectations fulfilled, it is a must for us to fulfill others’ expectations as well. In this way by fulfilling each other’s expectations, we can find happiness in the world and make it a happier place to live.

Question 4.
What is the importance of cooperation in our lives?
Answer:
There is no denying the fact that life cannot run even for a single day without others’ cooperation. In life, we cooperate with others and they cooperate with us as well. Parents cooperate in the family to raise their children. All the teachers and students cooperate in school to provide better education. In this way, cooperation exists in every part of our lives. In its absence, life cannot move even for a day. In this way cooperation with others is a must for a good life.

Question 5.
What is the art of understanding?
Answer:
Life cannot be completed without understanding. To complete any work, the art of better understanding is a must. Understanding one’s own to live life, understanding rules to play games, understanding their love before parents anger, understanding behavior of friends, etc. are a few of the aspects which we can observe in life. If there will not no aspect of understanding in our lives, we won’t be able to do anything in life. Those we don’t have the ability of understanding, cannot do anything in life. On the other hand, people with understanding abilities do great progress in life. That’s why the art of understanding is in everyone’s life.

Question 6.
Explain the development of creativity.
Answer:
The meaning of creativity is to create or to do something new, unique, and original. People with a creative mind, always think of new ideas and they always try to express such ideas in a unique way. Different individuals have different qualities and traits. An individual with a creative mind uses this quality to develop himself and that’s why he gets social respect. This type of focus can be associated with any field i.e. art, literature, science, etc. If such creativity will be developed among students, we can properly use their energy to create new ideas.

Long Answer Type Question:

Question 1.
Briefly describe the story given in the chapter.
Answer:
Once upon, there was a person called Mangat. He met with an accident and got badly hurt. He was admitted to the hospital. He was unable to move, even he could not move to see the left or right side. On the next bed in the hospital, there was another patient named Vishal. He used to tell Mangat the beauty of nature seen through the window beside. Mangat listened to him and started to imagine the beauty of nature beyond the window.

Soon, he started recovering from the accident within a month. Finally, he was allowed to move a little -bit and was shifted to another bed on which Vishal was lying. Now, he was in a position to look through the window. The hospital officials told him that Vishal passed away last night. When he tried to look through the window, there was no window on that wall. Officials also told him that Vishal was blind. He always gave Mangat hope that he will get well soon. After this, Mangat realized that help people support others to help them and improve them. Despite their own sorrows, they try to spread happiness.

Athletics Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

September 21, 2024September 20, 2024 by Prasanna

Athletics Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 1.
Describe the various officials for the athletics competition.
Answer:
Officials:
The following officials are needed to conduct an athletic event-
Administrative Officials:

Manager
Secretary
Technical Manager

Officials for the Meet:

Referee for Track Events
Referee for Field Events
Referee for Walking Events
Judge for Track Events
Judge for Field Events
Judge for Walking Events
Umpire
Time-keeper
Starter
Asstt. Starter
Markman
Lap Scorer
Recorder
Marshal

Additional Officials :

Announcer
Official Surveyor
Doctor
Stewards

Question 2.
Mention the Track events for men and women in Athletics competitions.
Answer:
Track Events for Men:

100 Metre Race
200 Metre Race
400 Metre Race
800 Metre Race
1500 Metre Race
3000 Metre Race
5000 Metre Race
10000 Metre Race
42195 Metre or 26 Mile Race
3000 Metre Steeple Chase
20.0 Metre Walking
30.0 Metre Walking
50.0 Metre Walking

Track Events for Women :

100 Metre Race
200 Metre Race
400 Metre Race
800 Metre Race
1500 Metre Race

Hurdle Races for Men :

110 Metre Hurdle Race
200 Metre Hurdle Race
400 Metre Hurdle Race

Hurdle Races for Women :

100 Metre Hurdle Race
200 Metre Hurdle Race

Relay Races for Men :

4 x 100 Metre
4 x 200 Metre
4 x 400 Metre
4 x 800 Metre
4 x 1500 Metre

Relay Races for Women:

4 x 100 Metre
4 x 200 Metre
4 x 400 Metre

MEDLEY RELAY RACE :
800 X 200 x 200 x 400

Question 3.
What are the general rules of Race?
Answer:
Rules of Track Events:
The rules of track events for the athletes are as follows-

1. Athletes should wear such clean clothes as are not subject to any objection.

2. Athletes can participate in a game with foot on feet. The footwear should be such as provides no additional help to the players in the game.

3. A player who causes an obstruction for other players or obstructs the progress of any player may be disqualified.

4. Each athlete should bear marks distinctly on his chest and back.

5. In lane races, a player shall have to confine himself to his lane from the beginning to the end of a play.

6. If a player knowingly runs out of his lane, he is disqualified. If, in the opinion of the referee, he has not done it knowingly, the referee may or may not disqualify him.

7. A player leaving his track of his own will is not allowed to continue his race.

8. If track and field events start simultaneously, a judge may allow an athlete to take part in a different way.

9. A point is scored against an athlete who makes an unnecessary delay in field events, and he is not permitted to take part in the trial. If he persists in it, he shall not be permitted to participate in one more trial, but his first performance shall be reckoned

10. The athletes are forbidden to use or even keep with them intoxicants and other such drugs. An athlete who makes use of such drugs may be disqualified.

11. In 800 metre race, the starter shall say in his own language: “On your marks”…. “set”, and the pistol shot is fired and the athletes start the race. For races above 800 metres only these words shall be uttered: “On our marks”, and when the players are ready, the pistol shot shall be fired.

12. An athlete should not touch the ground in front or start line with his hands or feet when he is in the position of “on your marks”.

13. If an athlete crosses the start line before the pistol shot, his start shall be a foul all athletic are given a warning for it. If any body does it twice he may be disqualified.

14. The position of the players is decided on the finish line. A player touching the finish line first with any part of his body is considered to have reached across first.

15. In hurdle race, are player may be disqualified if he obstructs other competitors by extending his hand and feet, covers the hurdle of the other player’s lane, and if, in the opinion of the referee, fells that hurdle knowingly.

16. A player cannot be disqualified if the hurdles fall due to other reasons than rules mentioned above.

17. he referee can order for replay of the race in case a player has obstructed another player.

18. If the number of participants in throw events is excessive, the referee fixes qualifying marks, and six chances are given in the end.

19. If a racer continues to throw hurdles not with his hands but with his feets, he cannot be disqualified.

20. An athlete is barred from participating in the race if he takes start fouls twice

Question 4.
In how many categories can we divide Athletics?
Answer:
There are long jump, high jump, triple jump and pole vault in field events for men. For women, there are long jump and high jump. In throwing events for men, there are shot put, javelin throw and hammer throw. Only hammer throw is not meant for women.

Decathlon for men:
In Decathlon there are ten events which the athlete has to complete in two days.
First day events:

100 metre Race
Long Jump
Shot-put
High Jump
400 metre race

Second day events:

110 metre Hurdle
Discus throw
Pole vault
Jevelin throw
1500 metre Race

Hepatathelon for women:
In Hepathelon there are seven events which the Athlete has to complete in two days.
First day events:

100 metre hurdle
Long Jump
Short-put

Second day events:

200 metre Race
Jevelin throw
800 metre race

Question 5.
Draw a diagram of 200 metre Track and 400 metre Track.
Answer:
Track for 200 metres:
The length of this track is 94 metre while the breadth is 53 metre-
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 1

Total running distance = 200 metres
Length of sides = 40 metres
Space covered by the sides = 40 x 2 = 80 metres
Space covered by the corners = 120 metres

Track for 400 metres:
Minimum dimensions = 17.40 x 90.40 metres
Total running distance = 400 metres
Straight length = 80 metres
Distance of both sides = 160 metres
Distance of curves = 240 metres
Diameter = 38.18 metres
Radius of the running distance = 38.18 metres
Marking radius = 37.88 metres

Question 6.
What do you mean by sprints?
Answer:
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 3
You can obtain creditable achievements by sprinting under the ; conditions of the competition, and by developing strength and stamina. through heavy hurdles instead of focusing attention on the method of running. The basic aspects of a race include the pace and length of steps in addition to the starting technique. Many players learn to acquire efficiency in sprinting at high speed. Don’t waste much time in the training of running outside the blocks.

Developing Speed: Run a sprint 10 yards off the rolling start, and record the time. You can run a number of sprints.
Leg-action: Clear a track of 70 yards. Coming out of 15 yard rolling start, run a sprint on the cleared track. Mark the footsteps. You will see that the length of footsteps after having increased comes 4 to definite length.
The length of footsteps and the speed of legs are co-related. These are determined chiefly by the length of legs, flexibility and strength of hips. You can hope to increase to some extent, to an important extent, the length of your steps, if you increase through training the flexibility and strength of hips and keep a steady pace in the lane.

The following methods may be useful :
(i) Movements of Arms:
The movements of arms in sprinting is essential to keep the body in action. It is a common practice with the racers to move the arms backward and forward of their bodies by moving these briskly at 90° ahead. While bringing the arm back, it should be straightened and then bent at the angle of the wrist. But it develops naturally in co-ordination between pace of legs and time.

(ii) The Start:
The movement of front foot is seen in figures 3 and 4, and it is an important aspect of efficient start. Keeping the blocks depends upon the length of your arms and legs, and to a certain extent upon your strength. Keep the blocks in such a way that the front block is 18 inches behind the line, and the rear about 36 inches away from the line. Continue practising with these distances till you develop good rate for your body and strength.

Bend your body, in the condition shown in figure 2, to such an extent that most of the weight falls on arms and the hips raised be above the shoulders. Now remember that the front knee forms an angle of 90°. In this condition, the face of the front block is at 60°, and of the rear block perpendicular. Raise the shoulders as much as possible. Increase the extra length of arms by straightening each hand.

(iii) Training:
You can acquire efficiency in sprinting by getting training in increasing the speed of your running at full speed on the track. You can prepare a daily routine in accordance with the example given ahead :
Form a rolling start of 6 x 70 yards with the rest intervals of 1 x 180 yards. When you are used to it, repeat it after the rest of 5 minutes. When you are perfectly normal, repeat this schedule thrice. By following it, you can increase the load of the work by steadily decreasing the rest intervals. When you practice in a group with an efficient starter, and the use of the pistol shot, the training for the start of sprint becomes very important.

Some useful practice should be done in the presence of the critics. Of course, each sprinter should be ready to make his start under possible good conditions. Set a standard for your training. Don’t feel satisfied with a little achievement. The training of heavy hurdles is essential for the whole body of a sprinter, particularly for his arms, shoulders and legs. Two practice sessions of at least 40 minutes each per week are essential for it.
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 4

Question 7.
How many events are there in track events? After how many fouls after the wrong start can an athlete be dismissed?
Answer:

Track Events of Races-Short, Middle and Long:
(I) Sprinting.
Sprint is that race which is run at full speed and with full strength. It includes 100 and 200 metre races. Even 400 metre race has come to be included in it now-a-days. In these races, reaction time and speed hold much importance.
(i) Start-
Generally, three types of start are taken in sprints:

Bunch Start
Medium Start
Elongated Start

1. Bunch Start:
For this kind of start the distance between blocks should be 8 to 10 inches. The next block should be 19 inches away from the starting line. The sprinter bends in the block in forward direction so that the toes of his back foot and the heel of the forward foot are in the same line. The hand should form a bridge on the starting line and behind the line. In this start, as soon as the set position is declared, the hips are brought upward. This start is the most unstable.

2. Medium Start:
In the medium start the distance between blocks is from 10 to 13 inches. The distance between the first block and the starting line is about 15 inches. The athletes often make use of this start. In this start, the knee of the lagging leg and the central part of the leading leg are in the same fine. At the set position, hips and shoulders are at the same height.

3. Elongated Start:
The athletes rarely make use of this start. In this type of start, the distance between blocks is 25 to 28 inches. The knee of the lagging leg is in the line with the heel of the leading leg.
Start:
The three types of orders have to be adhered to while taking the start for a race-

On your mark
Set position
Go, with the pistol shot

Finish of the Race:
The finish of the race also holds much importance. Generally, athletes finish the race in the following three ways-

Run through
Lunging
The shoulders string

(II) Middle-distance Races:
Track events include a few middle distance races. The races more than 400 yards and less than 1000 yards fall in this category. They are generally 400 and 800 metre races. These races require both speed and endurance. The athlete possessing both these qualities succeed in such competitions. In the beginning of such a race, uniform speed is maintained and full energy is used to win towards the end of the race. Start for 400 metre race is taken like a sprint start, whereas, the start for 800 metre race can be taken only in standing position. As far as possible, big strides should be taken in this race.

(III) Long-distance Races:
Long-distance races, as the name implies, involve greater distance, and often cover a distance of over a mile. 1500, 3000 and 5000 metre races are long distance races. In these, races, the endurance of the player plays an important role. The player has to utilize his energy and stamina in a planned way. The athletes who become well-versed in this art become successful in long distance races. In long distance races, except at the beginning, an athlete keeps his body straight and little bent in the forward direction, with head straight and eyes towards the track.

Arms are loosely lifted in the forward direction and bent at elbows and hands without tensions.The actions of the arms and legs should be as far as possible without much effort forward. While running, the forward foot should touch the ground. Even the heel touches the ground. More push is, however, taken through the toes. In these races, strides should be short and uniform. The body should remain relaxed during the race.

Question 8.
How many types are there of Hurdle races? Describe briefly.
Answer:
100-Metre Hurdle Race:
The number of hurdles, height and distance for various competition-
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 5
Generally, athletes taking part in hurdle race take 8 strides to reach the first hurdle. While sitting on the starting block, the take off foot is kept in front. If the hurdler has more height and can run faster, the distance in his case can be short. In such a case he will run by keeping his stronger foot on the backward block. This will come two metres behind the hurdle.

For 3 to 5 strides the hurdler should look towards ground and after that he should concentrate on the hurdles. The difference between strides will go on increasing. The last stride, however, will be 6 inches (10 cm.) shorter than the jump. While running a hurdle race, the knee of the runner will be a bit higher than in the ordinary race. Only toes and not the whole foot should touch the ground.

While jumping over the hurdles the athlete should keep the jumping foot straight while elevating the leading foot above the knee. Toes of the foot should be bent towards the ground, and leading foot should be straightened and brought above the hurdle. The upper part of the body should be bent forward just after crossing the hurdle. The forward thigh should be pressed down so that the toes remain beside the hurdle after it has been crossed.

At the same time lagging leg, bending at the knee should be kept parallel to the ground, and the knee should be brought near the chest. In this way, when the foot crosses the hurdle, the runner will run faster. After having crossed the hurdle, the first stride should fall at a distance of 1.55 to 1.60 metres, the second stride at 2.10 metres, and the third stride at 2.00 metres (12 m., 13.72 m., 9.14 m., 14.20 m.)
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 6
In 400-metre hurdle race the most difficult problem a hurdler faces, is to synchronise his strides, that is, to set coordination among strides. The runners generally take 21 to 23 strides to cover the distance upto the first hurdle and take 13 to 15 or 17 strides between the hurdles. Some runners take 14 and then 16 strides for covering this distance. Jumping by right foot may prove to be more beneficial.

The jump is taken from 2 metres and the first stride on the ground, after crossing the hurdle, is of 1.20 metres. The technique is the same as that of 110 m. or 100 m. hurdle races. The time of 400 metre hurdle races is more than that of 400 metre race, by 2.5 to 3.5 seconds.
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 7

Question 9.
How 6 many events are there in field events?
Answer:
LONG JUMP:

Length of Runway
Breadth of Runway
Length of Pit
Breadth of Pit
Length of take of Board
Breadth of take of Board

Method of Long Jump:
To strengthen the jumping foot, the same method will be followed in long jump as is followed in high jump. First of all, the jumping foot is kept forward and the other foot behind it. The right foot is taken upward with a bend at the knee, and at the same time the right arm will be bent at the elbow. The method will be the same as is that of fast runners. This action will be performed first in the standing position, and then by walking four to five steps. When this action improves, it should be repeated to running while running a bit.

This time while going upward, the ground should not be touched:
(1) Running 6-7 steps, coming forward and jumping from the height, the athlete shall touch the ground. Repeating this action for some time, he will bring the jumping foot alongwith the other foot on the ground while landing on the ground.
(2) After the athletes have done the above action many times, a handkerchief shall be tied with the pole at more than the jumping height. The athletes shall be asked to jump and touch the handkerchief. By doing this, they will learn to jump and keep the upper part of the body straight.
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 8
METHOD OF LANDING:
The athletes shall’stand on the edge of the pit with both the feet in line and swing their arms backward and forward. They will bow at the knees and carry both arms behind. Afterwards, they shall bend their knees a bit more, take arms forward and then upward, and then shall jump intathe pit. As the athlete goes up into the air, he will bring the free foot behind and downward so that it may join the jumping foot.

The jumping foot shall remain with the knees, and the upper part of the body shall be straight. When the athlete goes up, both of his knees will be bent and in line with the thighs. Both arms will be on the head sides and upward. The body shall be bent back, and as the athlete is just going to jump in the pit he will carry the free leg forward, bending at the knee, his belly downward, and will try to rest his straightened leg in the air.

METHOD OF HITCH KICK:

After jumping, split in the air, feet forward and backward, the athlete shall bend on free foot, but his upper part of the body and head will be straight and will not go backward.
Now the athlete will keep the free foot in the air and land with jumping foot taken forward.
The other methods shall be the same as told above, except that at the time of landing free foot will be brought with the take-off foot and both feet will land together. All other methods shall be the same as described in the hang. The athletes should go on increasing the approach rim.
After having repeated the above actions, this should be done with the help of spring boards such as gymnasts do. In the absence of spring boards this can be done from a height so that the athletes may have good practice of right action in the air.

TRIPLE JUMP:

Approach Run:

Length of Runway = 40 m to 45 metre
Breadth of Runway = 1.22 metre
Length of Pit = From take board to Pit = 21 metre
Breadth of Pit = 2.75 to 3 metre
Length of take of Board = 11 to 13 m
Length of take of Board = 1.22 m.
Breadth of take of Board = 20 c.m.

As in the long jump, approach run will be used in triple jump, too, but the speed shall be neither very fast nor very slow. Length of the Approach Run. An approach run of 18 to 22 or 40 to 45 steps is used in the triple jump. It depends upon the speed of the runner. Slow speed runner will take long approach and fast speed runner will take short approach. The athletes shall run by keeping both feet together and maintain a uniform running speed.

The upper part of the body shall remain erect. While taking of, the knee will be bent less as compared to the one in the long jump. While taking off and hop step, the weight of the body will be on the back and both the arms shall also be at the back. The second leg coming fast in the air will form a split position.
Three techniques are chiefly in vogue in triple jump-

Flat Technique
Steep Technique
Mixec Technique

HIGH JUMP:

Length of Runway = 15 to 25 m
Each side of triangle Cross Bar = 30 M.M.
Length of Cross Bar = 3.98 to 4.02 m
Weight of Cross Bar = 2 Kg
Length of Pit =5 m
Breadth of Pit = 4 m
Height of Pit = 60 cm

1. All the trainees shall be asked to first jump on their both legs: After they have got some practice, they will be asked to jump on one leg. It should be kept in mind that while jumping, the upper part of the body should be kept straight. All the trainees should be divided on the basis of the taking off foot with which they feel comfortable :

Jumpers on left foot
Jumpers on right foot

2. The trainees shall keep their take-off foot forward and the other foot behind:
They will bring both arms bent at the elbow forward and then upward with speed. At the same time they will kick the other foot upward, and after jumping in the air, will come back on the ground on the same foot. At this time the knee of the take off foot will be slightly bent. The upper part of the body will be straight, and will rise up ahead and will come back at the same place. While going upward, the jumper should try to keep the waist and the forward foot in straight position.

3. Standing at an angle of 45°, the right foot jumpers on the right side and the left foot jumpers on the left side, moving forward, shall jump over the cross bar kept at a height of 2 feet, and come back on the ground on the same take off foot. The only difference will be that instead of falling on their places they will cross the bar, and the other foot, as they fall, will come 10 to 12 inches forward of the first and will move ahead.

4. The height of the cross bar will be increased: The athletes will be asked to elongate the take off foot while taking off. The heel should come on the ground first. Both the arms should be bent at the elbows. While jumping, the athletes should concentrate on the cross bar, with the head leaning behind and the toes of the foot upward and straight.

Points to be remembered:
The following points should be kept in mind-

Both the arms will be taken upward quickly.
The take off foot will leave the ground only when free leg reaches its full height.
The above activity will also be done while jogging.

5. Crossbar. Keeping the crossbar 2 feet (60 cm.) high, the players shall jump over the crossbar as explained in 3, and then will rotate 90° in the air while coming in the pit. Hie players taking off by left foot will turn towards the left, and the players taking off by right foot, towards the right.
The following two points shall be borne in mind:

The players should not rotate while taking off.
They should not rotate before reaching maximum height.

6. The athlete will stand keeping taking off foot forward but he will keep in mind that the weight of the body should be on the heel, and that they will kick upward with kick upward with free leg so that the whole body gets lifted up the ground.

7. A parallel line shall be marked on the ground. The athletes shall do the above mentioned action while standing on the right of this line. Reaching up in the air, the athlete will rotate the take-off foot towards the left, keeping his face down and lift the back foot up with a kick. In this, it shall be kept in mind that free leg is kicked straight. The take off leg will be kicked straight and will be taken up by bending it on the knee. The athletes can do it in the pit after jumping over the crossbar, because by taking fast kick, his balance may go off.

8. Jumping from three steps. Parallel to the crossbar, a line shall be drawn at a distance of 1 to 2 feet (45 to 60 cm.). The athlete will stand with both his feet at an angle of 30° with this line. Putting forward his take off foot, he will run with medium speed. The position of the third foot will be marked. Keeping both the feet on this position, the athlete will advance towards the crossbar and repeat the above mentioned activity. The height of the crossbar will go on increasing according to the convenience of the player.

POLE VAULT:

Length of Runway = 40 to 45 m
Breadth of Runway = 1.22 m
Landing Area = 5 x 5 m
Length of Cross Bar = 4.48 x 4.52 m
Size of one side of triangle Cross Bar = 30 M.M.
Weight of Cross Bar = 2.25 Kg
Height of Landing area = 61 to 91 cm
Length of vaulting Box = 1.08 m
Breadth of the Box from = 60 cm

Runway side:
In athletics pole vault is a very complex event. No other event while taking off in the pit needs so many activities as this event does. Therefore, it is difficult to learn and teach this event.

Selection of Athletes for Pole Vault:
An all-rounder alone can become a good pole vaulter as this is an event which maintains the stamina of the bodies in all ways such as speed, strength, endurance and co-ordination. A pole vaulter needs to be a good gymnast so that he may perform all activities at a time.

Holding and carrying the Pole:
Generally a pole is held in the left hand keeping the palm towards the ground. The right hand is placed beside the hip on the back and at the end of the pole. While holding the pole the left arm forms an angle of 100° with the elbow. The pole is held keeping the wrist straight and away from the body. With the right hand, the pole is pressed downward between the thumb and the first finger. Both the elbows form an angle of 100°. The distance between the two hands is from 24 inches (60 cm.) to 36 inches (80 cm.). This distance depends upon the body structure of the athlete and his comfort while running with the pole.

Running with the pole:

Walking with the pole kept overhead. It takes more time to carry the pole into the box. Therefore, it is not a very suitable method.
Walking with the pole kept at the level of head. Most of the pole vaulters in the world follow this method. While walking, the 1 pole is kept the level of head and in the line with the left shoulder. From right to left. In it, shoulders and arms remain in normal position.
Walking with the pole kept below the head. It exerts more pressure on arms which tires the body as one approaches the box. A very few athletes use it into practice.

Approach-run:
A pole-vaulter becomes self-confident when he starts getting correct approach run. The further action can be thought of later on. The best method for this is to make the athlete run with the pole for a distance of over 150 feet (50 metre) along a marked line (with the lime) on the ground.

By doing this action for some days the athlete’s foot will .touch the ground at the required position. Measure this distance with the tape and then work on the runway of the pole vault. The approach run has also to be increased or decreased alongwith the feet. There should be only one check mark in the approach run of the pole vault. If there are more marks, then the athlete instead of thinking about his style continues to think about the marks. The length of the approach run should be 40 to 45 metres. The athlete should be faster during his last 4 or 5 strides.

Pole Plant:
It is not possible to plant the pole with full speed. The speed has to be limited for doing it. The pole planting should be fast in case of steel pole and slow in case of a fibre glass pole. While planting steel pole the athlete should count “1 and 2”. On 1 he will take off his left foot and the knee of the right foot will lift upward. On 2 his body will start swinging. At this point the pole vaulter should leave his right leg free so that it may meet the left one. It facilitates better swinging.

Take off:
While taking off, the right knee should come forward. In this the body is lifted and the chest is pulled towards the pole. While leaving the ground, the hand and the arm are straightened. During the swing the right leg lifts upward.

Note:
While poling the athletes lift their hips first while their legs should come upwards and the hips should be kept down. The pole vaulter should keep in mind that he should remain with the pole until it becomes straight. While leaving the pole, he should free the downward hand first. It has been observed that many fresh pole vaulters take their back above the cross bar. It happens as a result of freeing the upper hand first.

Question 10.
Discuss the throw events in Athletes and mention their respective Rules.
Answer:

	Men	Women
1. Weight of Shot-put	7.260 kg. ± 5 gm.	4 kg. ± 5 gm.
2. Agnle of Throwing sector	34.92°	34.92°
3. Radius of circle	2.135 m ± 5 M.M.	–
4. Length of stop board	1.21 to 1.23 M.M.	–
5. Bredth of stop board	112 to 300 M.M.	–
6. Height of stop board	98 to 102 M.M.	–
7. Curcumference of shot-put	110 to 130 M.M.	95 to 110. M.M.

1. Initial Position:
The thrower will stand with his back towards the direction of throw. The weight of the body will be. on right foot. While bringing upper part of the body down, the right heel will be lifted and the left leg bent at the knee will go up to meet immediately the right foot. Both the feet will be inclined and the toes bent forward.

2. Glide:
Now the right foot will be straightened, and will come back with the heel of the right foot. The left foot will be kicked fast towards stop board. In sitting position the hips will be falling downwards. The right foot will be lifted up from the ground and will be kept towards the left with bent toes. At the same time the left foot will touch the ground on the right of the stop board. Now the toes of both the feet will be brought on the ground. Both the shoulders will be bent backward. The whole weight of the body will be on the right foot.
3. Final Phase:
The toes and the knee of the right foot will be rotated together towards the left and both the feet will be straightened. The whole weight of the body will be on both “the feet. The left shoulder will open forward. The right shoulder will lift up and rotate. The belly will be bent in the shape of a bow.

4. Putting/Throwing the Shot:
The right shoulder and right arm will go forward towards the shot. The left shoulder will go on advancing. The whole weight of the body will be on the left foot which will be completely straight. As the shot is thrown with right hand, the position of both the feet will change. The left foot will come backward and the right foot forward. Now the body weight will rest on the right foot. Both the upper part of the body and the right foot will remain bent forward.

Throwing the Shot by Rotating or Like a Discus:
1. Initial Position:
At the start the athlete will stand with his back towards the direction of throw. The left foot will be on the center line and the right foot on the right side. The right foot will be placed at 5 to 8 centimetres away from the rim so as to avoid foul while rotating. The shot will be near the lower part of the neck and the elbow will be lifted upward. Before starting, the shoulder, belly, left arm and the shot, all will turn towards the left and then towards the right. While doing so both the knees will remain bent.

2. Rotation:
The body weight will rest on both feet. After taking one swing in the upword direction, the rotation will start. While rotating the upper part of the body, the body weight will shift on the left foot. In this position, the left arm is kept on the left and parallel to the ground, and while shifting the weight on the left toes the athlete will rotate with both knees bent. On the right toes also he will rotate through 90°. The right foot, bent at the knee, will be brought above the left foot.

While rotating on the left foot, on the completion of circle, both feet will be in the air, and the wrist will be rotated. The left foot will be on the toes of the right foot. The position of the toes of the right foot will be the same as the hand of the clock at 2 o’ clock. The foot of Mr. Bahadur Singh remains in the position of 10 o’clock. He rotates his waist even in the air. In the 2 o’clock position the left foot will come on the toes with some delay, but the upper part is kept in the centre. In the position of 10 o’clock the left foot comes fast on the ground, and there is always a possibility that the upper part of the body comes up very soon.

We shall keep the following points in mind :

At the start, walk with maintaining the balance, and keep the left foot down.
The complete glide will be taken with right foot. The jump will not be taken, and the upper part of the body will not be lifted.
The right foot will be bent inward while coming in the centre.
The left shoulder and the hip will not be lifted in haste.
The left arm should be kept near the body.
The left foot will touch the ground neither very fast nor very slowly.

General Rules:
1. In men’s group, the weight of the shot is 7.26 kg. while in women’s group it is 4.00 kg. In men’s group, the diameter of the shot is 110-130 cm. whereas in women’s group it is 95 to 110 cm.

2. The shot is thrown from a circle of 2.135 m. diameter. The inner part will be cemented and 25 mm. lower than the field. The stop board will be 1.22 mm. long, 114 mm. wide, and 100 mm. high.

3. The shot, hammer or the discus will be a sector of 40° angle. From centre a 20 m. line will be marked. On this line a point will be taken at 18.84 m. Two more points at a distance of 6.84 m. on both sides of this point will be taken, and the two lines drawn from these two points shall make an angle of 40°. While throwing the shot the body should be kept in balance. At the fall of the shot on the ground the athletes shall come from behind the 75 cm. lines dividing the field into two parts. Now the shot will be taken in hand. It will remain near the neck and not behind shoulder. It will be considered a foul if the sector lines are touched. If there are eight competitors, 6 chances will be provided to each. If there is a tie, the number of chances may be 9.

Initial Stance of Discus Throw:

Weight of Discus = 2 kg for men and 1 kg for women
Radius of circle = 2.5 metre ± 5 M.M.
Angle of throwing sector = 34.922
Circumference of outside = 219 to 2.21 M.M.
For men 180 of Discus to 182 M.M. for women.

The athlete will stand near the ring and in the circle with his back in the direction of throw. He will take one or two swings, with right arm arid trunk. While doing so, the body weight will shift from one foot to the other, as a result of which heels will be lifted up. When the discus and the upper part of the body are both on the right, the round will start. The round of throw shall start from the lower part, the left leg will be inclined towards the left, the weight of the body will also rest on this foot. The right foot, waist and belly will also rotate, and it will bring along with it the right arm and discus.

It is in this way that the shot activity will start. First of all, the left foot will leave the ground. After this it will advance in the direction of discus throw. The right leg, bent at knee, will advance from left to right in a semi-circle. While rotating both will be ahead of the shoulder. It will cause a bend between the upper and the lower parts of the body. The right arm holding the discus will be straight. The left arm bent at the elbow will face the chest. The head with straight. Placing the right foot a bit above the ground, the thrower will cross the circle and will come on the ground at the toes of the right foot. This foot will come almost in the centre. The toes will be bent towards the left.

Methods:
In main, there are three methods in it:
1. At the start, the trainees keep their right foot at the centre line and the left foot 10 cm. behind the ring.

2. In the second method, the player keeps the centre line between both of their feet.
3. In the third method, the throwers keep their left leg on the centre line. Thus, the players place their feet within the circle in three ways, in the position of 3 o’ clock, in the position of 10 o’ clock and in the position of 12 o’clock. The last position (of 12 o’ clock) is considered i to be the best as it requires less rotation on the right foot and the left shoulder need not be opened. The right foot even after coming on the ground will continue to rotate and the toes of the left foot will touch the ground on left side of the centre line and the end of the circle.
Last Step:
At this time, in the last step, both the feet will be on the ground and the waist will be bent at the back, the left foot will be straight and the right foot bent at the back, the left foot will be straight and the right foot bent at the knee. The right knee and the hip will be in the rotating position in the left. The left arm will be opened upward and the right arm will also be brought upward keeping it away from the body.

Throwing:
Both the feet going ahead in rotation will be straight. Hips will go forward, and shoulders and trunk will have finished rotation. Left arm and shoulder will stop at a position. Right arm and shoulder will advance forward. The body weight will be on the toes and both the feet will be straight. In the end, left foot will come backward and right foot will advance and will bend at the knee. The upper part of the body will be bent forward. This is done to maintain the balance of the body.

General rules:
In men’s group, the weight of the discus is 2 kg. whereas in women’s group it is 1 kg. The diameter of the circle is 2.50 m. These days an iron cage is fitted outside the discus to avoid anybody being hurt or injured with the discus. It is in the shape of the English letter C. Its height is 3.35 m.

Question 11.
Write down about the Javelin throw.
Answer:
Javelin throw:
Javelin is placed near the ear at the level of head with the arm bent at the elbow. Both javelin and the elbow will face forward. The palm of the hand will be upward and parallel to the ground. The total length will be 30-35 m. The athlete shall run straight in the 3/4 th run. In the last, l/3rd part cross steps will be taken equal to five strides. In the last phase when the left foot will touch the check mark, the right shoulder will start leaving towards right and the right arm will start coming at the back. The distance between steps will start increasing.

The right hand and the shoulder will come behind and will open on the right. The waist and the upper part of the body will bend backward. A bend will be formed between upper and lower parts because the upper part will open on the right and the lower part will advance straight ahead. The eyes will remain looking ahead. In the end, the right foot will come in the end of the cross step on the ground. As the knee advances, the heel of the right foot will start lifting up. In this way, it helps the left foot in going to a long distance.

Last Phase:
In the the right foot and straightening it all shall bend the upper body in the backward direction like a bow, and will create tension in the muscles of chest and stomach.

JAVELIN THROW:

Weight of Javelin = 800 g for men and 600 gm, for women
Length of Runway = 30 to 36.50 m
Breadth of Runway =4 m
Length of Javelin = 200 to 270 cm for men. 220 to 230 cm for women
Angle of throwing
sector of Javelin = 28.95

After throwing the javelin, to maintain balance of the body and to avoid foul, the thrower will bring a change in steps. The right leg will come forward and bend at the knee, and the toes will bend on the left. The upper part of the body will bend on the right and keep balance. The right foot can advance forward, too.

GENERAL RULES:

For men the length of javelin is 260 to 2.70 m., and for women, it is 2.20 to 2.30 m.
For throwing javelin we need a path which is 30.5 to 36.50 m. long and 4 m. wide. On the front side there will be a 70 mm. iron arc white in colour and projected 75 cm. on both sides. It can be made of white lime. This line can be drawn 8 m from the centre.
The sector for the javelin is of 29°. It is marked wherever the curve meets. For correct angle at 40 m., the distance between two lines will be 20 m. and at 60 m. it will be 30 m.
The javelin will be thrown by holding it from the central grip. The front end of the javelin should touch the ground. Touching of any part of the body with 50 cm. wide lines or 70 cm. wide line will be deemed as a foul.
The javelin shall remain in the direction of throw from start to finish. The javelin will not be thrown by rotating. It will be thrown from above the shoulders.

Question 12.
What do you know about Relay Races?
Answer:
RELAY RACES:
Men:

4 x 100 metre
4 x 200 metre
4 X 400 metre
4 x 800 metre

Women:

4 x 100 metre
4 x 400 metre

MEDLEY RELAY RACE:
800 x 200 x 200 x 400 metre

Baton:
In all medley relay races the baton has to be carried. Baton should be of a hollow tube and its length should not exceed 30 cm. Its circumference should be 12 cm. and weight should be 50 gm.

Relay Race Track:
The relay race track should be divided or marked by small paths for full circle. If it is not possible, then the baton exchange path should be through narrow paths.

Start of Relay Race:
At the start of the race any part of the baton can cross the initial line, but the baton is not to touch the ground above:
Taking the Baton:
An area is also fixed for taking the baton. This area is marked by drawing a line 10 m. long on both sides of the fixed race distance line. Thus, a type of room is formed for giving and receiving the baton. In relay races up to 4 x 200 metre all the other members of the team excepting the first runner begin to run from outside the fixed area but from a distance less than 10 metre.

Exchange of Baton:
The exchange of baton should take place within the fixed area. Pushing or providing any type of help is forbidden. The runner cannot throw baton to each other. If the baton falls, it will be picked up only by the one who has fallen it.

HURDLE RACES:

High Jump Score Sheet:

Score Sheet (For Height):

Score Sheet (For Distance):
PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Solutions Athletics 30
Score Sheet (Races):

Important Information About the Athletics

No player having taken intoxicating drugs can participate in athletic competition.
An athlete who causes an obstruction in the play of the other athlete is disqualified. An athlete who leaves the track of his own will, cannot continue his race again.
There are two types of events in field events such as jumping and throw events. The events which are run in track are known track events.
The length and breadth of 200 metre track are 40 and 38.15 metres respectively, while for 400 metre track these are 176.36 and 90.40 metres respectively.
The weight of the javelin for boys is 800 gms. and for girls, from 605 to 625 gms. The weight of the discus for boys is 2 kg.
The height of 110 metre hurdles for boys is 1.06 metres and for junior boys, the height of 100 metre hurdles is 0.75 metre. For senior girls this height shall be 0.89 metre.

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Book Solutions Athletics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Solutions Chapter 4 Empathy

September 21, 2024September 20, 2024 by Prasanna

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Book Solutions Chapter 4 Empathy Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Welcome Life Chapter 4 Empathy

Welcome Life Guide for Class 10 PSEB Empathy In Text Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What tasks your mother also does?
Answer:
My mother goes to the office and does all the household work herself. She cooks for us, washes the clothes, cleans the house, and takes care of the needs of all the family members.

Question 2.
What are the tasks, both of your parents do?
Answer:
They both go to their respective office, share most of the household work, bring household things collectively from the market and collectively care about my study.

Question 3.
What homework activities will you share with your mother?
Answer:
First of all, I will help her to keep the house clean. We will not spread dirt in the house and will keep everything in place. We will help them dry clothes and do other small chores.

Question 4.
How many homework activities will you share with your spouse?
Answer:
I will help her to wrap dry clothes, bring items from the market and help her to keep the house clean. I will also help my kids to study properly.

Activity – 1

Question 1.
After one year, which type of facilities and how many do you want to have?
Answer:
After one year, I want :

to have a good smartphone to do the study properly.
to have a good Laptop and internet connection so that my online classes must go smoothly.
to have a car so that I can’t move around with my parents.
to have twenty-four hours electricity supply.

Activity – 2

Question 1.
Look at the picture, here and total ten things. Out of these, which thing is enough to fulfill our many needs and do the work of the other nine facilities?

PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Solutions Chapter 4 Empathy Img 1

Answer:
Out of all these things, I would prefer to “have a smartphone which fulfills all our many needs. We can watch T.V., listen to the telephone, can do accounting, can make alarms, can see time, click pictures and make videos. Along with this, it can do all the work of a computer.

Activity – 3

Question 1.
Which message does Symbolically suggest the concept of fist by school counselor?
Answer:
The school counselor was of the view that all the issues should be resolved with great care. He said that great patience, proper language, and knowledge are required to solve sensitive issues.
PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Solutions Chapter 4 Empathy Img 2
For this, there is a need to know about the basic reason for the issue, listen to others respectfully, and decide with proper care. The decision must not be imposed upon anyone.

Question 2.
Please write down five sensitive issues in these five fingers.
Answer:
PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Solutions Chapter 4 Empathy Img 3
Five sensitive issues are :
(a) Religious issues
(b) Linguistic issues
(c) Family-related issues
(d) Social issues
(e) Issue of Women’s Security.

PSEB 10th Class Welcome Life Guide Empathy Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by sensitive issues?
Answer:
Sensitive issues are the issues that are related to serious issues and it’s not possible for everyone to solve them. Solving them requires a lot of wisdom, for example, personal issues of any family or religious and linguistic issues of any society.

Question 2.
Which points did the school counselor suggest to solve the sensitive issues?
Answer:
School counselor Khushminder Singh told students that sensitive issues cannot be easily solved. For this, the following things should keep in mind :

An individual must have tolerance, patience, proper knowledge, good language, etc. Along with this, there is definitely a need to know the basic reason for the issue, listen to each and every person carefully, and make a solid decision about it.
Decisions must not be imposed upon anyone, but an atmosphere should be
created so that others should understand the decision to solve the sensitive issue.
First of all, put ourselves in the situation in which someone else is facing the situation.
Such issues must not be thrown in the open air but should be solved secretly by sitting in a room.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Welcome Life Empathy Important Questions and Answers

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Which type of quality it is when we behave respectfully while living in society?
(a) Sensitivity
(b) Respectfulness
(c) Hardness
(d) Sympathy
Answer:
(a) Sensitivity

2. What is the name of ‘Pain’?
(a) Understand collective pain
(b) One’s own pain
(c) Problem of society
(d) Pleasure of society
Answer:
(b) One’s own pain

3. Sympathy means :
(a) One’s own pain
(b) Understanding collective pain
(c) Problem of society
(d) Pleasure of society.
Answer:
(b) Understanding collective pain.

4. Which of these is not a symbol of sensitivity?
(a) When parents love more to one of their children
(b) Making a girl as clay monitor
(c) (a) and (b) both
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) (a) and (b) both

5. ………………….. are very much necessary to live life.
(a) Wishes
(b) Hardness
(c) Jealousy
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Wishes

6. Which of these is more required to live life?
(a) Bread
(b) Shelter
(c) Cloth
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

7. What should we do for social welfare?
(a) Save trees
(b) Say no to drugs
(c) Save the environment
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

8. The Principal called ………… students to his office.
(a) 10
(b) 12
(c) 14
(d) 16
Answer:
(c) 14

9. What is required to solve the sensitive issue?
(а) Patience
(b) Proper knowledge
(c) To know the basic reason
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Fill in the Blanks:

1. ……………… was the school counselor.
Answer:
Khushminder Singh

2. ……………….. of the school made a committee of 14 students.
Answer:
Principal

3. An individual must have …………… wishes.
Answer:
less

4. …………………. is a must in human life.
Answer:
Change

5. Every person in this world is ……………………
Answer:
distinctive

6. ……………… is of great importance in student life.
Answer:
Friendship

True / False :

1. Change is not necessary for life.
Answer:
False

2. There is 90 place of friendship in Student’s life.
Answer:
False

3. Every person is different from the other.
Answer:
True

4. Special care is required to solve sensitive issues.
Answer:
True

5. Every individual is a sensitive one.
Answer:
True

Match the Column:

Column A	Column B
(a) Pain	(i) Friendship
(b) Sympathy	(ii) One’s own pain
(c) Food, Cloth, Shelter	(iii) Collective pain of all
(d) Sensitive Issue	(iv) Needs of Life
(e) Student Life	(v) Religious Issue

Answer:

Column A	Column B
(a) Pain	(ii) One’s own pain
(b) Sympathy	(iii) Collective pain of all
(c) Food, Cloth, Shelter	(iv) Needs of Life
(d) Sensitive Issue	(v) Religious Issue
(e) Student Life	(i) Friendship

Very Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
What is the quality of sensitivity?
Answer:
While living in society, when we want to behave respectfully with others, it is known as quality of sensitivity.

Question 2.
What is the limited meaning of Pain?
Answer:
The limited meaning of pain is one’s own pain.

Question 3.
What is the broader meaning of Sympathy?
Answer:
The broader meaning of sympathy is to understand the collective pain of all.

Question 4.
What complain do we have with our siblings?
Answer:
Those parents love them more.

Question 5.
What complaints do boys have in school?
Answer:
Those girls are made monitors in school?

Question 6.
Who made the work of the boys and girls separately?
Answer:
It’s not nature, but society itself has decided that what work will they do?

Question 7.
What is the basic need of living life?
Answer:
The basic need of living life is bread, shelter, and cloth.

Question 8.
What is necessary to live life?
Answer:
Needs and aspirations are necessary to live life.

Question 9.
How can we serve our society?
Answer:
By saving the environment and trees and by saving ourselves from drugs, we can serve our society.

Question 10.
How can we fulfill our increasing needs with fewer resources?
Answer:
By keeping fewer aspirations, we can fulfill our increasing needs in fewer resources.

Question 11.
What did the Principal tell in the morning assembly?
Answer:
He told the students that they would be in charge of tomorrow’s society. That’s why they must learn to accept responsibilities.

Question 12.
Of how many students and why the Principle Sir made a committee?
Answer:
The Principal sir made a committee of 44 students to solve the sensitive issues.

Question 13.
What is required to solve any sensitive issue?
Answer:
Patience, proper knowledge and listen carefully to others while solving any sensitive issue.

Question 14.
What is required to have good relationships?
Answer:
For good relationships, it is necessary to accept others according to their personality.

Question 15.
What is of great importance in a student’s life?
Answer:
Friendship is of great importance in students’ life.

Question 16.
What is the major problem in human life?
Answer:
We want that everyone should live life according to their wishes.

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Explain Pain and Sympathy in detail.
Answer:
We live in society and behave respectfully with others. It is so because we have a quality of sensitivity. We treat everyone equally. That’s why boys and girls, males and females are required to treat each other on equal terms. Here we can see the meaning of pain and sympathy. The limited meaning of pain is one’s own pain and the broader meaning of sympathy is to understand everyone’s pain.

Question 2.
How can boys and girls develop well?
Answer:
Children do many works for their parents. No matter whether it’s a boy or girl, both should collectively work for the parents. But it is not necessary that they will do only that work which is assigned to them by society. Their roles can be changed. Society gives its own perspective which can be changed. If this perspective will be changed along with the assigned roles, definitely boys and girls can be developed in a better way.!

Question 3.
What is the importance of aspirations in our lives?
Answer:
Aspirations are of great importance in our lives. Needs and aspirations are very much necessary to live life. One cannot do anything in the absence of aspirations. But aspirations should be limited or they will create problems for us. There is definitely a need to keep them under limits. Just as life requires food, clothing, and shelter, so – does a good life that can only happen with the fulfillment of desires.

Question 4.
What did Principal Sir say in the morning assembly?
Answer:
In the morning assembly, Principal Sir told the students that they will be in charge of tomorrow’s society. He asked for the names of ten students, who feel that they can solve the personal and family problems of their friends. At that time 14 students came forward and there was clapping for them.

Question 5.
What problems did the students report?
Answer:

One child reported that tension prevails at his home for no reason.
One girl said that two boys in her neighborhood were making bad comments about her.
Another boy reported that in the class in front of him, a little boy was teased and abused by older boys.
Another girl said that people in her street have illicit relations which often leads to quarrels in their house.

Question 6.
What is the major problem of human life and how can it be solved?
Answer:
The major problem of human life is that we want that people should live life according to their wishes. That’s why we want everyone to change according to us. Its * better solution is that we should accept them in their present form. We must not change others but should accept them as they are. Everyone is different and we can learn a lot from this difference. If we try to change everyone, we will fail and not be happy.

Long Answer Type Question:

Question 1.
How should we accept others?
Answer:
Everyone in this world is different from each other. Every individuals’ appearance is different from each other and that’s why their personalities are also different. If we want to keep good relationships with others, it is necessary for us to accept them in their original form. If we look carefully then these differences are blessings for us. These differences are complementary to each other. When We accept others, we learn a lot from them. If we will not accept others then will remain alone. Friends are of great importance in students’ life because we accept them as they are. That’s why we must accept others in their actual or original form to keep good relations with them.

PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Solutions Chapter 6 Sociological and Psychological Aspects of Physical Education

September 21, 2024September 20, 2024 by Prasanna

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physical Education Chapter 6 Sociological and Psychological Aspects of Physical Education

Physical Education Guide for Class 12 PSEB Sociological and Psychological Aspects of Physical Education Textbook Questions and Answers

One Mark Question-Answers

Question 1.
Where has the word Sociology been define from?
Answer:
The word Sociolgy has been derived from two words ‘Socius’ meaning associate or companion and ‘logos’ means knowledge.

Question 2.
Which country is considered to be the most ancient civilizations in the world?
Answer:
Greek.

Question 3.
Which sports is considered to be the mother of all sports?
Answer:
Gymnastics.

Two Marks Question-Answers

Question 4.
Write the definition of Sociology.
Answer:
According to Garrett, ‘‘Socialization is the process where by the biological individual is converted into human person.”
According to Ogburn, ‘‘Socialization is the process by which the individual learns to conform to the norms of the group”.

Question 5.
What is the meaning of Sociology?
Answer:
The literal meaning of the term sociology is composed of two words ‘Socius’ meaning associate or social and ‘logos’ meaning science or study. Thus sociology is the science of society. Sociology is the scientific study of society, patterns of social relationships, social interaction and culture of everyday life. The main focus of sociology is to study the human society in relation to its origins, functions and problems. It works on relation among people, group, class, organization and culture. It also helps in varying the impact of social organization like family, religion, education, politics, culture etc. on human behaviour.

Question 6.
Write about ‘brotherhood’.
Answer:
This implies that participation in sports activities helps in the development of social qualities such as brotherhood feeling, equality and sympathetic attitude, cooperation, helpfulness etc. The feeling of brotherhood is mainly developed through team games, where a player develops a feeling of affection and loyality for his team members.

Question 7.
How can a person get rid of Physical and mental stress?
Answer:
The following methods can be adopted to get rid from Physical ad mental stress:

Meditation and deep breathing exercises.
To keep yourself busy in constructive activities.
To recognize the stress causing situations.
Self-assessment and self control.
To remove stress with the help of pep-talks.
Participation in sports and recreational activities.

Three Marks Question-Answers

Question 8.
How are social values developed?
Answer:
“Participating in sports can improve the quality of life of individuals and communities, promote social inclusion, improve health, counter anti-social behaviour,’raise individual self-esteem and confidence, and widen horizons.”

Socialization enables a man to become an individual and at the same time a valuable member of society. Social development is a balanced set of social skills and learned adaptive behaviors that enables an individual to interact well with other people, react positively and avoid behaviour that has negative consequences. Sport has been used as a practical tool to engage young people in their communities through volunteering, resulting in higher levels of leadership, community engagement and altruism among young people.

Sports helps an individual much more than in the physical aspects alone. It builds character, teaches and develops strategic thinking, analytical thinking, leadership skills, goal setting, risk taking and many more. Cooperation, responsibility, empathy, self-control and self-reliance etc. are considered to be components of social development.

Question 9.
Explain the contribution of sports in National integration?
Answer:
Physical education and sports programme serves as a valuable means for the development of national and international integration. It provides activities that help participants to deeply understand the cultural diversity, different castes and religions, their social norms, ethical and moral issues in their life. Physical education and sports provides a common platform to unite different segments of people to work for a common goal.

Hence, physical activity and sports programmes should be practiced to inculcate these values in school curriculum. Keeping in view the development of community integration through sports it should be an educational phenomenon. The idea behind the origin of Olympic Games by the Greeks were development of brotherhood and cooperation through sports. The French man Baron Pierre De Coubertin advanced the same idea, for the revival of modem Olympic Games in 1896.

Question 10.
Write a note on the following:
(i) Educational institution
(ii) Social groups
(iii) Development of leadership
(iv) Selection of the Right sport.
Answer:
(i) Educational institution (School):
An educational institution such as school play a pivotal role in the child’s life. These institutions help in crafting children to interact positively with the members of society such as their friends, family and teachers etc. That is why schools are also known to be the second home of learning for children. The behaviour of children and their personality development not only depends on the upbringing by the parents but also on the way they are evolved in their school lives. So, now-a-days it is becoming more challenging for the schools to inculcate every aspect of child’s personality development rather than just to impart bookish knowledge.

(ii) Social groups:
Just as family, the peer or friends group to have an important role in child’s behaviour. When the children interact with their friends they learn social skills such as communication, helpfulness, co-operation, brotherhood etc. in the group. But, unfortunately we don’t always realize how children are attached to their friends and what influence they have on their behaviour. Hence, if a child remains in bad group, he will learn bad habits and if he lives in a good friends group the same will have positive impact on his behaviour.

(iii) Development of leadership:
There are ample opportunities in games and sports, where the leadership qualities are developed in sportspersons. The main base of sports activities is to direct and establish common aim among team members and group. Through games and sport various leadership qualities are developed in sportspersons such as loyahty, empathy, ability, discipline, enthusiasm, responsibility etc.

(iv) Selection of the right sport:
The knowledge of psychology helps in the selection of athletes for a particular sports after testing and observation of behaviour. It is important to possess some psychological traits such as will power, interest, motivation, competitive spirit to prepare well in the field of spores. So while making selection for the team and preparing them for competition the knowledge of psychological behaviour would prove to be beneficial.

Five Marks Question-Answers

Question 11.
What is learning? Explain the definition and principles of learning.
Answer:
The concept of learning can be understood as the change in behaviour as a result of experience, acquisition of new habits and skills. The change of behaviour is relatively permanent in nature. It is believed that learning is a lifelong process that begins in cradle and ends in coffin. It has been viewed that a person adapts to his environment by acquiring new survival and social skills. It is not necessarily being a positive change in behaviour. It is most appropriately lasting change in the behaviour as a result of experience which gives satisfaction and fulfilment in social context. Further, to an ordinary man, it may be understood as formal way of acquiring skills and knowledge but it is not confined to four walls.

According to Gates:
“Learning is the modification of behaviour through experience and training.”
According to E.R. Hilgard: “Learning is a permanent change in behaviour that occurs as a result of prior experience.”
According to Mitchel: has defined learning as “the process by which new behaviour is acquired.”
According to G.Murphy: “The term learning covers every modification in behaviour to meet environmental requirements.”

1. Law of Readiness:
The first most important law related to learning implies that a person must be ready to learn i.e. he should have interest for what he is going to learn. If the person is not interested he will not learn, whatever the situation is given or presented before him. He should have clear objective and reason to learn something e.g. ‘ ‘You can take a horse to a pond, but cannot make him drink, if he is not thirsty.” Similarly, a child does not leam if he/she has no reason for it. Secondly, if an individual is not ready in terms of physical abilities, mental capabilities and emotionally then also they will not be able to find any reason to leam.

2. Law of Effect:
It is natural that an individual works continually to leam if the result or outcome of the learning has a positive effect on the learner or if the learner feels satisfying and pleasant. It is simply the positive feedback and strong effect of learning. It gives positive reinforcement and motivation to leam if the effect is satisfying and the learner will continue to leam in order to improve. On the other hand, if the learner experiences unsatisfying,, unpleasant feelings, then it creates difficulty for a task to be learned by the student. Hence, it is very challenging for a teacher or instructor to retain positive outcomes from the learning situation for the learner. Hence, the chances of success and continuity in learning definitely increase if the effect of learning experiences is pleasant and satisfying.

3. Law of Exercise:
This law simply states that it is important to practice or repeat to retain and remember particular things. The correct and precise repetition of a particular task leads to accurate movement and improvement related to particular skill or knowledge. It can further be understood as law of use and law of disuse:

(i) Law of Use:
It implies that in order to have perfection or improvement in particular learning, it is necessary to reduce errors by making repetition for a particular task. This would lead to less error and more perfection or improvement. In other words, practice makes a man perfect.”

(ii) Law of Disuse:
When a modifiable connection is not made between a situation and response, during a length of time, that connection’s strength is decreased.” The things learnt are not easy to retain, evaluate and apply after a single session of practice. Hie skills shown and practised once leads to weakening of stimulus and response of the learners. Hence, it is important to practice and strengthen the stimulus and response related to the learning of skills.

Question 12.
What do you know about the problems of adolescence? Explain in detail.
Answer:
During this period of growth, many physiological, biological, psychological and behaviour changes can be seen in adolescence. Due to these unseen and unexpected rapid changes, adolescents face many problems as mentioned below:

1. Problems related to biological changes:
The problems related to physical or biological changes occur both in boys as well as girls. These changes are internal physiological changes such as menstruation periods in females and nightfall among boys. Due to these physiological changes, they experience aggresive drives, restless and difficulty in adapting to these sudden changes. These changes can also be seen on the surface of the body in both genders. The most observable change is the growth of body hair.

2. Problems related to psychological behaviour:
During this age, adolescents become highly mal-adjusted due to physiological changes. They get entangled in stress, tension, anxiety, strife, irritable behaviour; mood swings and self consciousness etc. They begin to quarrel with elders over small issues. Sometimes, the adolescent feels so excited as top of the world and sometimes he finds himself in a state of depression. According to Ross, ‘ ‘ The adolescent lives intensely emotional life, in which we can see the rhythm of positive and negative phases of behaviour in his constant alteration between intense excitement and deep depression.”

3. Freedom:
In this age an adolescent seeks freedom of thoughts and acts from his parents. Due to intense physical and mental changes adolescent wants to exhibit that they tend to make themselves free from any kind of parental control or boundations. But, they should be given freedom with responsiblity at the same time. They should be neither overprotected nor under protected.

4. Recognition and self consciousness:
During adolescent period the child seeks social attention and recognition. He wants to be recognised as mature, who understands every aspect related to society and tries to attract everyone’s attention in the group with his acts. He tries to change his behaviour as a result of physical and mental maturity.

5. Destructive tendencies and behaviour:
During this age the adolescents fall prey to destructive behaviour or tendencies if not guided properly. They tend to show aggressive behaviour, especially when they are compelled to do any activity against their desire or liking. Adolescents experiments with drugs, smoking, alcohol, watching adult films under the influence of ignorance.

6. Peer relationship:
It has been observed that friends are very important for this age group. They have keen desire to be outside with the company of their friends rather than family members. They try to present themselves better than others in order to maintain their respect and value in the group. This is an appropriate age for socialization if they get proper guidance.

7. Problems related to career choices:
The problems related to choice related to educational stream, vocational guidance occurs during his age. During this age of schooling they have to make selection regarding his subjects for the future career aspect. The maturity level of this age group keep them in dilemma whether it is a right decision or not for their future. The whole career depends on the selection of the subjects and course made by them.

8. Lack of stability in relation to dependency:
This age is the bridge between childhood and adulthood, hence it is neither the age of maturity nor immaturity. So, an adolescent always struggle between the dependent or independent behaviour. On one hand, he does not leave the adolescent and on the other hand he wants to take responsibility. Lack of experience and immaturity leads to experience emotional imbalance.

9. Sex related problems:
During adolescence many physiological changes occurs and this may result in the intense sexual urges. They get attracted towards opposite gender or they want to indulge in satisfying sexual desires. This may lead to distraction from their family members sometimes leading to complex situations.

Question 13.
What is the meaning of Psychology? What is the importance of Psychology in sports?
Answer:
The concept of studying human behaviour and their mental processes was first recognized by the Greek psychologists Sigmund Freud. To study human behaviour the knowledge of psychology must be understood. The word ‘Psychology’ has been derived from the Greek terms ‘psyche’ and ‘logos’ where ‘psyche’ means the ‘soul or mind’, and the meaning of logos is to talk about’ or ‘science or study’. Hence, the meaning of psychology is the science or study of soul. But, the meaning and concept of psychology kept on changing. Later, the concept was explained as science of mind, as the psycho-physical unity of a human being cannot be ignored. Today, it is understood as the science of behaviour of an individual in relation to the environment.

Definitions of Psychology:
According to Warren, “Psychology is the science which deals with the mutual interrelation between an organism and environment.”
According to Woodworth, “Psychology deals with the activities of the individuals in relation to his environment.”
According to Crow and Crow, “Psychology is the study of human behaviour and human relationship.
According to MC Dougall, “Psychology is the study of human behaviour, its cause and conditions.”

Importance of Psychology in Games and Sports:
Physical education and sports involves bodily movement in an environment related to physical activities. Moreover, the need of psychology automatically arises on account of the applicability of the principles of psychology in Education. Since, the start of an organised programme of Physical Education and competitive sports where everyone is willing to win at any cost, we cannot perform well without proper knowledge of psychological behaviour of a sportsperson e.g. his interest, attitude, motivation, aptitute, emotional behaviour pattern and individual differences etc. Physical performance in sports is no longer restricted to a physical or physiological domain of the athlete. It is well understood that numerous psychological factors affect and improve the performance level of an athlete.

Physical capacities although limited to a certain extent can be modified under certain psychological conditions such as motivating an athlete or reinforcement of behaviour. Therefore, there is an essence to exploit the capability through the application of psychological aspects in the field of sports. Physical education teachers, coaches and trainers therefore should apply its knowledge to enhance individual development and achievements.

1. To know and understand the behaviour:
The first most important aspect of psychology is to know an individual and understand his behaviour in different situations. This understanding related to behaviour helps in dealing with various aspects of a person e.g. interest and attitude of a person towards an activity, his emotional state during various competitive situations etc. This would certainly help the teachers and coaches to direct their students towards an activity which may be beneficial in terms of performance.

2. Channelization and Control of Emotions:
The study of psychology helps in understanding the feelings and emotions of an individual or a sportsperson particularly during practice and competitive situations such as anxiety, fear, stress etc. The knowledge of psychology helps in understanding and channelizing these emotions towards right direction during competitive situations. During these situations psychological techniques such as meditation, autogenic training, concentration etc. can be practised.

3. Selection and preparation of athletics:
The knowledge of psychology helps in the selection of athletes for a particular sports after testing and observation of behaviour. It is important to possess some psychological traits such as will power, interest, motivation, competitive spirit to prepare well in the field of sports. So while making selection for the team and preparing them for competition the knowledge of psychological behaviour would prove to be beneficial.

4. Important as a relaxation tool:
Psychology is not just to help people to understand their behaviour. It also helps to move athletes to next level of performance. To learn how basic psychological tools such as goal setting, imagery, self talk, relaxation skills can help with the problems when things go wrong. It would not just help to deal with problems or issues, it will help the sportsperson to understand how self talk can influence emotion and behaviour achieves peak performance.

5. Help in motivation to improve:
Some sports psychologist work with athletes and coaches to improve performance and increase motivation. It helps the athletes to cope up with difficult situations.

PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Guide Sociological and Psychological Aspects of Physical Education Important Questions and Answers

One Mark Question-Answers

Question 1.
The word psychology has been derived from which language?
Answer:
The word psychology has been derived from the Latin language.

Question 2.
Give literal meaning of sociology. .
Answer:
The literal meaning of term sociology is composed of two words ‘Socius’ meaning associate or social and ‘logos’ meaning to study or science.

Question 3.
Name two social qualities.
Answer:

Brotherhood feeling
Moral and character development.

Question 4.
Highlight two social institutions affecting human behaviour.
Answer:

Family
Edcuational Institution.

Question 5.
Who was the father of Modern Olympic Game?
Answer:
Baron Pierre de Coubertin.

Question 6.
In which year Modern Olympic Games was started?
Answer:
In the year 1896.

Question 7.
Highlight moral and character qualities of a person.
Answer:

(i) Mutual understanding
(ii) empathy.

Question 8.
Define psychology.
Answer:
According to Woodsworth “Psychology deals with the actvities of the individual in relation to his environment.

Question 9.
Highlight two importance of psychology.
Answer:

To know and understand the behaviour.
Channelization of emotion.

Question 10.
Elucidate the concept of learning.
Answer:
Learning implies change in behaviour of an individual as a result of experience, acquisition of new habits and skills.

Question 11.
Enlist two laws of learning.
Answer:

Law of Readiness
Law of exercise.

Question 12.
Give the types of transfer of training.
Answer:

Positive transfer of training
Negative transfer of training
Zero transfer of training.

Question 13.
Give the literal meaning of adolescence.
Answer:
The literal meaning of adolescence is to grow to maturity.

Question 14.
Enlist any two problems of adolescents.
Answer:

Problem related to biological changes
Problem related to psychological behaviour.

Question 15.
Give two measures to solve problem related to adolesence.
Answer:

Parental guidance and knowledge
Sex education.

Question 16.
Highlight major countries which contributed in the development of sports.
Answer:
Greece, China, Japan, India, USA, Sweeden, Denmark.

Question 17.
What is transfer of training?
Answer:
Transfer of training refers to carrying over of habits, skills and attitude from one learning area to other area.

Question 18.
Elucidate various laws of learning.
Answer:

Law of Readiness
Law of Exercise
Law of Effect.

Question 19.
Who presented various laws of learning?
Answer:
E.L. Thorndike.

Question 20.
Enlist various social qualities.
Answer:

Brotherhood feeling
Helpfulness.

Question 21.
What do you understand by socialization?
Answer:
The process of acquiring social qualities, skills, knowledge and value to development social relation is called socialization.

Question 22.
Who was the father of psychology?
Answer:
Sigmund Freud.

Two Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
What do you understand by sociology?
Answer:
In order to learn social skills to survive in a conducive social environment a man has to go through social learning is known to be sociology.
Alex Inkeles, “Sociology is the study of system of social action and of their interrelations.”

Question 2.
Define Sociology.
Answer:
Young and Mack defined Sociology as, “The scientific study of the social aspects of human life.”

Question 3.
Highlight various social qualities.
Answer:

Community building
Character and moral qualities
Group feeling and responsibility
Channelization of energy

Question 4.
Name any two social institutions affecting human behaviour.
Answer:
The Family:
The key role and foundation of human behaviour is influenced by the family. The family traditions, values, beliefs, ethics deeply affects the behaviour of a child. A child’s behaviour is most influenced by their family members since they are the primary social group.

Educational Institution (School):
An educational institution such as school play a pivotal role in the child’s life. These institutions help in crafting children to interact positively with the members of society such as their friends, family and teachers etc. That is why schools are also known to be the second home of learning for children.

Question 5.
What is the role of sports in National Integration?
Answer:
Understanding cultural diversity:
Participation in physical acitivity helps in deep understanding related to cultural diversity and democracy. It helps to practice and understand the values, ways of living, their language, problems related to different communities and religions.

Question 6.
What do you know about control of emotions?
Answer:
The study of psychology helps in understanding the feelings and emotions of an individual or a sportsperson particularly during practice and competitive situations such as anxiety, fear, stress etc. The knowledge of psychology helps in understanding and channelizing these emotions towards right direction during competitive situations. During these situations psychological techniques such as meditation, autogenic training, concentration etc. can be practised.

Question 7.
Give the literal meaning of the term learning.
Answer:
The concept of learning can be understood as the change in behaviour as a result of experience, acquisition of new habits and skills. The change of behaviour is relatively permanent in nature. It is believed that learning is a lifelong process that begins in cradle and ends in coffin. It has been viewed that a person adapts to his environment by acquiring new survival and social skills. It is not necessarily being a positive change in behaviour. It is most appropriately lasting change in the behaviour as a result of experience which gives satisfaction and fulfilment in social context. Further, to an ordinary man, it may be understood as formal way of acquiring skills and knowledge but it is not confined to four walls.

Question 8.
Elucidate the various laws of learning.
Answer:

Law of Readiness.
Law of Effect.
Law of Exercise.

Question 9.
What is the difference between the law of use and disuse?
Answer:
Law of Use:
It implies that in order to have perfection or improvement in particular learning, it is necessary to reduce errors by making repetition for a particular task. This would lead to less error and more perfection or improvement. In other words, practice makes a man perfect.”

Law of Disuse:
When a modifiable connection is not made between a situation and response, during a length of time, that connection’s strength is decreased.” The things learnt are not easy to retain, evaluate and apply after a single session of practice. The skills shown and practised once leads to weakening of stimulus and response of the learners. Hence, it is important to practice and strengthen the stimulus and response related to the learning of skills.

Question 10.
What do you know about transfer Of learning?
Answer:
Generally, transfer of training refers to carrying over of habits, skills and attitude from one learning area to another area. Sometimes it has been observed that skills or techniques learnt in one area helps or creates hindrance in the other area, so it is said to have the impact of transfer of training.
According to Perkinson and Salomon, “When learning in one context enhances (or undermines) a related performance in another contexts is called transfer of learning.”

Question 11.
Enlist various types of transfer of training.
Answer:
The application of previous learning in new learning may influence in three ways: The skills, behaviour, knowledge and habits acquired may either help the new learning or create hindrance in the new learning or may not have any influence on the new learning. Hence it can be categorised under three sub headings:
1. Positive transfer of training.
2. Negative transfer of training.
3. Neutral or Zero transfer of training.

Question 12.
How would you explain positive transfer of training?
Answer:
When the skills, behaviour or knowledge habits acquired in previous learning area helps in the new learning area that can be termed as positive transfer of training. It may also be termed as generalization of the skills or knowledge in the new situation, e.g. in physical education and sports situation the endurance developed by running long distance can help in the endurance capacity to new learning area-swimming. This would help in swimming for longer duration as general component of endurance developed with the help of previous learning area. Positive transfer occurs when learning one skills makes a way to learn the next one easier.

Question 13.
What do you mean by zero transfer of training?
Answer:
This condition of transfer of training occurs when the previously learned skills has nothing to do with the new learning area. In other words it implies that the skills, knowledge, habit acquired in previous learning area neither creates hindrance problems nor facilitates the learning of new skills. For example, the skills learnt in Volleyball like smashing & service etc. neither helps in learning any of the Gymnastics skills.

Question 14.
Give the literal meaning of adolescence.
Answer:
The literal meaning of the word adolescence is derived from a Latin word ‘adolescere’ which means ‘to grow to maturity.’ This is generally considered to be the transitional stage of physical and psychological changes.
According to Jersield, ‘‘Adolescence is the period through which a gorwing person makes transition from childhood to maturity. ”

Question 15.
Highlight various problems of adolescence.
Answer:

Problems related to biological changes
Problems related to psychological behaviour
Freedom
Recognition and self consciousness
Destructive tendencies and behaviour
Peer relationship
Problems related to career choices
Lack of stability in relation to dependencys

Question 16.
Explain the contribution of Greek for the development of sports.
Answer:
The Greek civilization has the oldest culture in the world. It was the ‘Golden Era’ in the field of sports. The highest event in the field of sports was originated by the Greek civilization i.e. Ancient Olympic Games in 776 B.C. Their philosophy for the same was to stay healthy and fit and overall development for the benefit of citizens.

The main states were Athens and Sparta to introduce games and sports to celebrate the festival in honour of God Zeus. The main activities included in the festival were wrestling, chariot races, running, throwing, horse riding and hunting etc. Due to the impact of Roman invaders the games came to end in 394 A.D.

Question 17.
What contribution give by Japan for the development of sports?
Answer:
The history of games and sports in Japan can be classified into two periods before The Meiji Era(up to 1867) and after the Meiji Era (1867 onwards). There is not much evidence suggesting rigorous involvement in games and sports prior to 1867. However, during early period Archery, Horse riding, Wrestling and Judo etc.were the major physical activities. After 1867, games and sports were introduced in the schools on similar patterns like that the western countries.

Starting with callisthenic and military drills, Swedish gymnastic type exercises were adopted.In 1913 military drills Judo, fencing were introduced in the schools and later on 1936 in revised curriculum many other athletics activities and Ball games were added.Their physical education program was based on scientific lines contributing to the health and physical fitness of the students with an objective to develop wholesome personality.

Three Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
Give two definitions of the term sociology.
Answer:
Alex Inkeles, “Sociology is the study of system of social action and of their interrelations.”
Young and Mack defined Sociology as, “The scientific study of the social aspects of human life.”

Question 2.
Write any two social institutions affecting human behaviour.
Answer:
The various social institutions that play a vital role in moulding the behaviour have been listed below: .
1. Peer Group:
Just as family, the peer or freinds group to have an important role in child’s behaviour. When the children interact with their friends they learn social skills such as communication, helpfulness, co-operation, brotherhood etc. in the group. But, unfortunately we don’t always realize how children are attached to their friends and what influence they have on their behaviour. Hence, if a child remains in bad group, he will learn bad habits and if he lives in a good friends group the same will have positive impact on his behaviour.

2. Religious Institutions:
A religious institution is a place where a unified system of beliefs, values and practices relative to sacred things are acquired. These institutions play a major role in imbibing moral values such as speaking the truth, not to harm others, sympathetic attitude, respecting elders, helpfulness etc. Hence, these values play significant role in the behaviour of a child. It is also believed that the people spending time in these institutions are tolerant by nature , peaceful and remain content and happy in their life.

Question 3.
Write a short note on:
(a) Religious institutions
(b) National culture.
Answer:
(a) Religious Institutions:
A religious institution is a place where a unified system of beliefs, values and practices relative to sacred things are acquired. These institutions play a major role in imbibing moral values such as speaking the truth, not to harm others, sympathetic attitude, respecting elders, helpfulness etc. Hence, these values play significant role in the behaviour of a child. It is also believed that the people spending time in these institutions are tolerant by nature , peaceful and remain content and happy in their life.

(b) National Culture:
The nation in which children bom and grow with due care of both family and state, with quality education, without any bias thought would prove to be a strength of nation.

Question 4.
How would you elucidate the role of sports in national integration?
Answer:
Understanding cultural diversity:
Participation in physical acitivity helps in deep understanding related to cultural diversity and democracy. It helps to practice and understand the values, ways of living, their language, problems related to different communities and religions. Thus, in the field of sports new connection and bonding among the players is formed and in certain cases this turns into relationship. Thus, games and sports help in promoting goodwill, unity and understanding, that may provide solution to many national problems.

Equal opportunities to all:
The physical education and sports programme provides no space for the discrimination on the basis of caste, creed, religion or colour etc. It ensures that one remains free from any sense of discrimination. Especially in team games, members of the team are selected from different regions of the country to represent national team. Thus, the players belonging to different caste, religion or region develops feeling of togetherness, brotherhood, co-operation, helpfulness and goodwill to achieve common goal as a national team. These qualities become an integral part of their nature, conduct and behaviour in real life. So, we develop sports in the belief that this would help in solving many national problems and develop national integration.

Respect for nation and patriotism:
Physical Education and sports plays an important role in inculcating the feeling of belongingness to the nation and national character. The team or an individual representing nation feels honoured and thus spirit of patriotism is developed in same way. Thus, the programme of physical education and sports are planned in such a way that the j spirit of patriotism and national respect strengthens among the participants.

Question 5.
Highlight the importance of psychology.
Answer:
To know and understand the behaviour:
The first most important aspect of/ psychology is to know an individual and understand his behaviour in different situations. This understanding related to behaviour helps in dealing with various aspects of a person e.g. interest and attitude of a person towards an activity, his emotional state during various competitive situations etc. This would certainly help the teachers and coaches to direct their students towards an activity which may be beneficial in terms of performance.

Channelization and Control of Emotions:
The study of psychology helps in understanding the feelings and emotions of an individual or a sportsperson particularly during practice and competitive situations such as anxiety, fear, stress etc. The knowledge of psychology helps in understanding and channelizing these emotions towards right direction during competitive situations. During these situations psychological techniques such as meditation, autogenic training, concentration etc. can be practised.

Question 6.
What is concept of learning?
Answer:
The concept of learning can be understood as the change in behaviour as a result of experience, acquisition of new habits and skills. The change of behaviour is relatively permanent in nature. It is believed that learning is a lifelong process that begins in cradle and ends in coffin. It has been viewed that a person adapts to his environment by acquiring new survival and social skills. It is not necessarily being a positive change in behaviour. It is most appropriately lasting change in the behaviour as a result of experience which gives satisfaction and fulfilment in social context. Further, to an ordinary man, it may be understood as formal way of acquiring skills and knowledge but it is not confined to four walls.

Question 7.
Define learning.
Answer:
According to Gates, “Learning is the modification of behaviour through experience and training.”
According to E.R. Hilgard, “Learning is a permanent change in behaviour that occurs as a result of prior experience.”
According to Mitchel has defined learning as “the process by which new behaviour is acquired.”

Five Marks Question-Answers

Question 1.
What do you understand by the term Sociology? How physical education and sports help in the development of social qualities.
Answer:
The literal meaning of the term sociology is composed of two words ‘Socius’ meaning associate or social and ‘logos’ meaning science or study. Thus sociology is the science of society. Sociology is the scientific study of society, patterns of social relationships, social interaction and culture of everyday life. The main focus of sociology is to study the human society in relation to its origins, functions and problems. It works on relation among people, group, class, organization and culture. It also helps in varying the impact of social organization like family, religion, education, politics, culture etc. on human behaviour.

Development of social Qualities Through Sports:
Sports play a significant role in the lives of children and young people by shaping their development into useful members of the society and the sorts of people they become in their life. In terms of development of social qualities through sports, following areas have been discussed:

1. Community building:
The role of sports in the community building has shown strong link with the social cohesion and social capital among children and youth. Sports provide opportunities to these children and youth to engage themselves in their communities through volunteer participation which results in the development of leadership qualities, positive peer relationship regardless of gender, ability and ethnicity.

2. Character and moral qualities:
The moral behaviour and character development is acquired through social interaction that occurs through sports and physical activities depend on the context of programe and values promoted in the sports scenario. In this
way, physical education teacher, coach, trainer have a determinant role to influence the character building of youth or children with appropriate sports programme. It has been observed that physical activity outside of competetive sports are more beneficial in promoting mutual understanding and empathy among children and youth.

3. Group feeling and responsibility:
Team games act as a model for the development of group feeling or cohesion. The best way to develop group feeling or ‘We’ is to engage youth and children in the team participation. It helps in the development of social qualities such as brotherhood, helpfulness,respect, cooperation, sympathetic attitude etc among the members of team or a group.

4. Channelization of energy:
Games and sports play an important role in channelizing the energy in an appropriate way. This is the best means to divert the hidden emotions, negative thoughts into constructive and meaningful activities and bring desirable changes in the behaviour of a person. So, it is useful means to provide an appropriate outlet to these negative thoughts and emotions otherwise the same can be dangerous for the society.

5. Punctuality and dedication:
Participation in games and sports requires lot of dedication, keeping in view the rules of games to perform well. It helps in inculcating the sense of responsibility, value of time, punctuality and respect for other team mates and cooperation of all team members to achieve results. These qualities are better learned in the field of physical education and sports, which proves to be very useful in other fields of life as a member of society. Hence, these qualities helps to become a productive member of the society.

Question 2.
Elucidate the term psychology. Also highlight its importance in the field of sports.
Answer:
The concept of studying human behaviour and their mental processes was first recognized by the Greek psychologists Sigmund Freud. To study human behaviour the knowledge of psychology must be understood. The word ‘Psychology’ has been derived from the Greek terms ‘psyche’ and ‘logos’ where ‘psyche’ means the ‘soul or mind’, and the meaning of ‘logos’ is ‘to talk about’ or ‘science or study’. Hence, the meaning of psychology is the science or study of soul. But, the meaning and concept of psychology kept on changing. Later, the concept was explained as science of mind, as the psycho-physical unity of a human being cannot be ignored. Today, it is understood as the science of behaviour of an individual in relation to the environment.

According to Woodworth, “Psychology deals with the activities of the individuals in relation to his environment.”
Importance of Psychology in Physical Education and Sports.
1. To know and understand the behaviour:
The first most important aspect of psychology is to know an individual and understand his behaviour in different situations. This understanding related to behaviour helps in dealing with various aspects of a person e.g. interest and attitude of a person towards an activity, his emotional state during various. competitive situations etc. This would certainly help the teachers and coaches to direct their students towards an activity which may be beneficial in terms of performance.

2. Channelization and Control of Emotions:
The study of psychology helps in understanding the feelings and emotions of an individual or a sportsperson particularly
during practice and competitive situations such as anxiety, fear, stress etc. The knowledge of psychology helps in understanding and channelizing these emotions towards right direction during competitive situations. During these situations psychological techniques such as meditation, autogenic training, concentration etc. can be practised.

5. Help in motivation to improve:
Some sports psychologist work with athletes and coaches to improve performance and increase motivation. It helps the athletes to cope up with difficult situations.

Question 3.
What is learning? Explain the various types of transfer of training.
Answer:
The concept of learning can be understood as the change in behaviour as a result of experience, acquisition of new habits and skills. The change of behaviour is relatively permanent in nature. It is believed that learning is a lifelong process that begins in cradle and ends in coffin. It has been viewed that a person adapts to his environment by acquiring new survival and social skills. It is not necessarily being a positive change in behaviour.

It is most appropriately lasting change in the behaviour as a result of experience which gives satisfaction and fulfilment in social context. Further, to an ordinary man, it may be understood as formal way of acquiring skills and knowledge but it is not confined to four walls.
According to Gates, “Learning is the modification of behaviour through experience and training.”

Types of Transfer of Training:
The application of previous learning in new learning may influence in three ways: The skills, behaviour, knowledge and habits acquired may either help the new learning or create hindrance in the new learning or may not have any influence on the new learning. Hence it can be categorised under three sub headings:
1. Positive transfer of training.
2. Negative transfer of training.
3. Neutral or Zero transfer of training.

1. Positive transfer of training:
When the skills, behaviour or knowledge habits acquired in previous learning area helps in the new learning area that can be termed as positive transfer of training. It may also be termed as generalization of the skills or knowledge in the new situation, e.g. in physical education and sports situation the endurance developed by running long distance can help in the endurance capacity to new learning
area-swinuning. This would help in swimming for longer duration as general component of endurance developed with the help of previous learning area. Positive transfer occurs when learning one skills makes a way to learn the next one easier.

2. Negative Transfer of Training:
It is the situation when the skills, knowledge, habits acquired in previous learning area creates hinderance and problems in the new learning area. This type of transfer can be seen when the skills learnt in previous area overlaps the other one and causes confusions and problems for the new area. e.g. In games and sports situation the transfer of learning from Lawn tennis to Badminton causes hindrance in learning the gripping of racket. The reason for this could be in Lawn tennis, the gripping of racket needs strong and stiff wrist whereas in Badminton the vice versa i.e. flexible wrist is required for the same. Hence, this becomes quite harder for a learner to learn new skills.

3. Neutral or Zero Transfer of Training:
This condition of transfer of training occurs when the previously learned skills has nothing to do with the new learning area. In other words it implies that the skills, knowledge, habit acquired in previous learning area neither creates hindrance problems nor facilitates the learning of new skills. For example, the skills learnt in Volleyball like smashing & service etc. neither helps in learning any of the Gymnastics skills.

Question 4.
What do you know about the sports as cultural heritage?
Answer:
Culture can be defined as the behavior that comes to us either by inheritance or by the surroundings. Culture comprises our ways of living, eating habits, thoughts, customs, traditions, moral, art, literature, religion, games and sports and many other aspects of life. The term heritage is something that is transfered from the past to the present and from the present to the future with proper modifications. Heritage serves as a building bridge between the past and present.

Physical activities were part of ancient times as a means of existence like running, fishing, fighting and jumping etc. Later on, these were used to fulfill their basic needs slowly with change in time most of these physical activities were modified and were used for playing and recreation. Let’s trace out the historical development or sports as cultural heritage in various parts of the world:

1. Greece:
The Greek civilization has the oldest culture in the world. It was the ‘Golden Era’ in the field of sports. The highest event in the field of sports was originated by the Greek civilization i.e. Ancient Olympic Games in 776 B.C. Their philosophy for the same was to stay healthy and fit and overall development for the benefit of citizens. The main states were Athens and Sparta to introduce games and sports to celebrate the festival in honour of God Zeus. The main activities included in the festival were wrestling, chariot races, running, throwing, horse riding and hunting etc. Due to the impact of Roman invaders the games came to end in 394 A.D.

2. Rome:
Romans were not keen sports lovers as participants, they strongly believed in gaining supremacy with power and strength. The only purpose to take part in physical activities was to serve military purpose. The most practiced activities at that time was gladiater combats, man to man combat, birds fight, and the same used to continue till the end of other’s life. The blood shed and brutality brought vulgarity to these games and ended with the time. They introduced many combative games like chariot racing, jumping and sword fighting etc.

3. Germany:
The culture of sports as ‘aesthetisism’ was introduced by the Germans in the world. In the early 19th century, coincident with the rise of nationalism, Friedrich Ludwig John, considered the “father of gymnastics,” founded the gymnastics club, and invented several events that are now part of the Modem gymnastics program. At the same time, Johann Christoph Friedrich Guts-Muths initiated school programs that helped to promote physical education in the curriculum of German education programme. They introduced gymnastics apparatus like horizontal bar, vaulting horse and parallel bars etc to the world. So, the contribution of German can be realized as the introduction of Gymnastics.

4. Sweden:
In Sweden’s history of physical education and sports name of Per Henrik Ling appears at the forefront. He founded a system of gymnastics which has come to be known as Swedish Gymnastics and was later on adopted by United States of America also. He applied the science of anatomy and physiology to physical activities. His another contribution was in introducing new apparatus like stall bars, rings, swinging ropes etc. in Swedish system of gymnastics. He advocated physical activities for all and that exercise be prescribed keeping in view the individual differences. Swedish gymnastics devised corrective and curative exercises for correct posture and correct carriage of body.

5. Denmark:
In Denmark, Franz Nachtegall laid foundation of the physical education. Due to his continuous untiring efforts physical education games and sports were introduced in the schools. As the need for trained teachers grew he took lead in developing courses of study for this purpose. After his death, Danish Rifle Club was formed where training is shooting and military drill was imported. Niels Bukh introduced Primitive Gymnastic in which he included a series of exercise of arms, legs, neck joints, abdomen etc. at one stretch without any break. As a result of Nachtegall’s efforts physical education was made compulsory in all elementary schools and introduced in many high schools. Foundation of physical education physical activity was, thus firmly laid.

6. England:
The credit of popularizing outdoor games lies with the Britishers. The activities that were popular in England were Archeiy, Swimming, Rowing, Hockey, Football and later on Cricket and Tennis were also introduced during that period. The importance of introducing physical education in the school curriculum was presented by the Britishers. The emphasis were also laid to maintain and develop playground and gymnasium in the institution as well. So, the physical training, games and sports occupied prominent place in the British period.

7. United States of America:
The contribution of American culture can be realized with the introduction of new sphere of games i.e. ball games like soccer, tennis, baseball and ice hockey etc. Later on with the tremendous efforts YMCA organization Dr. James Naismith invented Basketball in the year 1991 in the training school Springfield. In the year 1895 volleyball game was invented by William G. Morgan at YMCA. After the revival of Modem Olympic Games in the year 1896, with the untiring efforts of ‘Baron Pierre Dr. Coubertin, the development of games and sports continued of its peak.

8. Japan:
The history of games and sports in Japan can be classified into two periods before The Meiji Era(up to 1867) and after the Meiji Era (1867 onwards). There is not much evidence suggesting rigorous involvement in games and sports prior to 1867. However, during early period Archery, Horse riding, Wrestling and Judo etc.were the major physical activities. After 1867, games and sports were introduced in the schools on similar patterns like that the western countries. Starting with callisthenic and military drills, Swedish gymnastic type exercises were adopted.In 1913 military drills Judo, fencing were introduced in the schools and later on 1936 in revised curriculum many other athletics activities and Ball games were added.Their physical education program was based on scientific lines contributing to the health and physical fitness of the students with an objective to develop wholesome personality.

9. China:
Although, it is believed that since 2698 BC Kung Fu a medicinal type of gymnastics was prevalent in China, Simple exercises like bending, stretching, skating were also practiced. Dancing, wrestling, bow and arrow, shooting were also popular. Period of ChouDynasty (1122 BC to 256 BC) gave impetus to physical activities and shooting, football, boxing, fencing, boat racing, throwing, and Chariot racing also became quite popular.The modem physical education came to occupy an important position only in 19thcentury. Earlier, calisthenics and military drills were introduced but later on ball games were also introduced.In 1929, physical education was introduced in the schools as the compulsory subject. Gradually, all major games found their way in the regular exercise programs and today China has emerged as a formidable country in the field of games and sports.

10. India:
India can boast of having rich sports heritage. During Indus Valley Civilization period (3250 BC to 2500 BC) it appears that dancing, swimming, boxing and dice games were quite popular in India. During Vedic period (2500 BC to 600 BC) yoga was being practiced, though more as a religious activity than as an exercise. Military drill, wrestling, bow and arrow shooting, fights with dagger, sword and mace, throwing discuss and spear, horse riding, chariot races, hunting, boxing were also prevalent. Early and later Hindu period (600 BC to 1000 AD) witnessed keen interest of the rulers in promoting the sports activities.

Medieval period (1000 AD to 175 AD) saw the emergence of Gurukul system where in physical activities occupied similar important status of education in other subjects. Activities like wrestling, sword fighting and other activities resembling martial arts were patronized by the rulers.Even during Mughal period, physical activities received due attention and were promoted and patronized by Mughal rulers. During this period wrestling, boxing, pigeon flying, swimming, hunting, animal fighting, chess,chopadand individual competitions were quite popular.

However, institution like akharas and vyamshalas took keen interest in promoting indigenous activities like dands, baithaks, malkham and popularized Indigenous games like Kho-Kho and Kabaddi. Yogic exercises, dancing, wrestling etc. also found place in the regular exercise programs. After independence various schemes and policies for promoting games and sports were adopted. Numerous sports associations and organizations have been set up to give impetus to physical activities. India also took initiative to organize a sports competition between Asian countries on the pattern of Olympic Games.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physical Education Book Solutions Chapter 6 Sociological and Psychological Aspects of Physical Education Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

September 20, 2024September 19, 2024 by Prasanna

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Book Solutions क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules.

क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

याद रखने योग्य बातें

क्रिकेट में खिलाड़ियों की गिनती = 16 (11 + 5 रिज़र्व)
विकटों के मध्य की दूरी = 22 गज़ (20.12 मीटर)
पिच की चौड़ाई। = 4’4′
विकटों की चौड़ाई = 9″, (22.9 सी० मै०)
क्रिकेट गेंद का घेरा = 8″ से 9″, (22, 4 सैं मी० से 22.4 मैं० मी०)
क्रिकेट गेंद का घेरा क्रिकेट गेद का भार = 51/2 औंस 5% औंस (156 ग्राम सैं० मी० 163 ग्राम)
बैट की चौड़ाई = 41/4″, (10.8 सैं०मी०)
बैट की लम्बाई = 38″, (6.5 सैं० मी०)
गेंद का रंग = दिन के मैच के लिए लाल और रात के लिए सफ़ेद
केन्द्र से बड़े सर्कल की दूरी = 75 गज़ से 85 गज़ (68 मीटर से 58 मीटर)
विकटों की ज़मीन से ऊंचाई = 28″, (71 cm.)
मैच की किस्में = 20, 20 ओवर, एक दिवसीय मैच, पांच दिन का टेस्ट मैच
मैच के अम्पायर = दो
तीसरा अम्पायर = एक मैच रैफ़री
केन्द्रीय विकेट के दोनों ओर पिच = 4 फुट 4 इंच की चौड़ाई
स्कोरर की संख्या = 2
पारी बदली का समय = 10 मिनट
खिलाड़ी बदली का समय = 2 मिनट
छोटे सर्कल का रेडियस = 2.7 मी०

क्रिकेट खेल की संक्षेप रूपरेखा
(Brief outline of the Cricket Game)

मैच दो टीमों के बीच खेला जाता है। प्रत्येक टीम में 11 खिलाड़ी होते हैं।
मैच के लिए दो अम्पायर नियुक्त किए जाते हैं। दोनों तरफ एक-एक अम्पायर होता है।
रनों का रिकार्ड स्कोरर रखता है।
ज़ख्मी या बीमार होने की दशा में खिलाड़ी तबदील किया जा सकता है, परन्तु उसे बैट या बाऊल करने की आज्ञा नहीं होती, वह विकटों के मध्य दूसरे खिलाड़ी के लिए दौड़ सकता है या फील्ड कर सकता है।
बदला हुआ खिलाड़ी अपने विशिष्ट स्थान (Specialised Position) पर फील्ड नहीं कर सकता।
बैट करने के लिये या फील्ड करने के लिए टीम के कप्तान टॉस करते हैं।
प्रत्येक इनिंग के आरम्भ में नया गेंद लिया जाता है। 200 रन बनने के पश्चात् या 75 ओवरों के बाद गेंद नया लिया जा सकता है। गेंद गुम हो जाने या नष्ट हो जाने पर नया गेंद ले सकते हैं, परन्तु उसकी हालत गुम हुए या खराब हुए गेंद से मिलती-जुलती होनी चाहिए।

प्रश्न
क्रिकेट गेंद, बैट, पिच विकट बाऊलिंग,पायिंग क्रीजें, पारी, खेल के आरम्भ, अन्त और इन्टरवल आदि के विषय में संक्षिप्त लिखें।
उत्तर-
(क) खिलाड़ी, निर्णायक (अम्पायर)
तथा फलांकनकर्ता (स्कोरर)

क्रिकेट मैच दो टीमों के बीच खेला जाता है। प्रत्येक टीम में खिलाड़ियों की संख्या 11-11 होती है। प्रत्येक टीम का एक कप्तान होता है जो पारी के लिए टॉस होने से पहले अपने खिलाड़ी मनोनीत करता है।।
किसी खिलाड़ी के घायल या अस्वस्थ हो जाने पर उसकी जगह पर किसी अन्य खिलाड़ी को लिए जाने की आज्ञा है। नए खिलाड़ी को सबस्टीच्यूट खिलाड़ी कहते हैं। सबस्टीच्यूट खिलाड़ी केवल फील्ड ही कर सकता है। वह बैट या बाऊल नहीं कर सकता।
पारी के लिए टॉस से पहले दोनों सिरों के लिए एक-एक निर्णायक (अम्पायर) नियुक्त किया जाता है, जो खेल का निष्पक्ष नियन्त्रण करता है।
सभी दौड़ों का रिकार्ड रखने के लिए दो फलांकनकर्ता (स्कोरर) नियुक्त किये जाते हैं। वे अम्पायरों के सभी इशारों तथा अनुदेशों का पालन करते हैं।

क्रिकेट किट
(Cricket Kit)
क्रिकेट के खिलाड़ी के लिए किट पहननी ज़रूरी है। किट से अभिप्राय सफेद पैंट, सफ़ेद कमीज़, बूट, जुराबें, पैड, अबडायिनल गार्ड, दस्ताने और बैट हैं।
(ख) खेल की सामग्री तथा मैदान

गेंद (Ball) क्रिकेट बाल (गेंद) का वज़न \(5 \frac{1}{2}\) औंस से कम और \(5 \frac{3}{4}\) औंस से से अधिक नहीं होना चाहिए। इसकी परिधि (घेरा) \(8 \frac{13}{16}\) कम तथा 9” से अधिक नहीं होनी चाहिए।
कोई भी कप्तान प्रत्येक पारी (इनिंग्ज़) के शुरू में नई गेंद ले सकता है। यदि खेल के दौरान गेंद गुम हो जाए या खराब हो जाए तो अम्पायर दूसरी गेंद लेने की अनुमति दे देता है। दूसरी गेंद प्रयोग या बनावट में पुरानी या खोई हुई गेंद से मिलती-जुलती होनी चाहिए।
बैट (Bat) क्रिकेट बैट सबसे चौड़े भाग में \(4 \frac{1}{4}\)” तथा लम्बाई में 38” से अधिक नहीं होना चाहिए। साधारण क्रिकेट बैट का भार \(2 \frac{1}{4}\) पौंड होता है।
पिच (Pitch) बाऊलिंग करने वाले स्थानों के बीच का क्षेत्र पिच कहलाता है। यह क्रिकेट के केन्द्र को जोड़ने वाली रेखा के दोनों ओर 4-4″ चौड़ी होती है तथा कुल पिच की चौड़ाई 8′-8″ होती है।
विकेट (Wicket)-पिच के आमने-सामने तीन-तीन विकेट गाड़ी जाएंगी तथा आमने-सामने की विकेटों की दूरी 22 गज़ होगी। विकटों की चौड़ाई 9” होगी और उन पर जाने वाली दो गिल्लियां (वेल्ज़) होंगी। स्टम्प इस प्रकार गाड़े जाएंगे कि उनमें से गेंद न निकल सके। स्टम्प की भूमि से ऊंचाई 28” होगी। प्रत्येक गुल्ली \(4 \frac{3}{4}\)” लम्बी होगी तथा स्टम्प पर रखी हुई उनसे \( \frac{1}{2}\)” से अधिक बाहर न निकलेगा।
नोट-जब तेज़ हवा चल रही हो तब टीमों के कप्तान अम्पायर की स्वीकृति से गिल्लियों का प्रयोग छोड़ भी सकते हैं।
गेंद प्रक्षेपण तथा अदृश्य मंज रेखा (Bowling Crease and Popping Crease)—प्रक्षेपण (बाऊलिंग) मंज रेखा स्टम्पों की सीध में 8 फुट 8” लम्बी होगी। इसके केन्द्र में स्टम्प होंगे। प्रक्षेपण मंज स्टम्पों के समानान्तर 4 फुट सामने की ओर अदृश्य मंज रेखा अंकित की जाएगी। यह स्टम्प रेखा के किसी भी पार्श्व सिरे से कम से कम 6 फुट तक बढ़ती है। विकेट के पीछे दोनों ओर समकोण पर 4 फुट की निवर्तन रेखा होगी। निवर्तन तथा अदृश्य मंज रेखाएं लम्बाई में असीमित मानी जाएंगी।

प्रश्न
क्रिकेट खेल कितने खिलाड़ी, निर्णायक, स्कोरर और उनकी किट के बारे में लिखें।
उत्तर-
खेल की रीति (Rules of Game)—

प्रत्येक टीम को बारी-बारी से दो पारियां मिलेंगी।
खेल आरम्भ होने से कम-से-कम 15 मिनट पहले दोनों टीमों के कप्तान पारियों के लिए टॉस (Toss) करेंगे।
टॉस जीतने वाली टीम का कप्तान बैट या फील्ड करने के निर्णय की सूचना विरोधी टीम के कप्तान को देगा। इस निर्णय का बाद में परिवर्तन नहीं हो सकता।
अनुवर्तित (फालो ऑन) (Follow on) कराना-पहले बैट करने वाली टीम यदि पांच दिन के मैच में 200, तीन दिन के मैच में 150, दो दिन के मैच में 100 और एक दिन के मैच में 75 (दौड़ें) रन अधिक बना लेती है तो वह अपनी विरोधी टीम से पारी अनुवर्तित (Follow on) करने के लिए कह सकती है।
पारी की घोषणा करना (डिक्लेयर करना) (Inning Declare)-मैच के दौरान किसी भी समय बैट करने वाली टीम का कप्तान अपनी पारी (इनिंग्ज़) समाप्त करने की घोषणा (Declare) कर सकता है।
खेल का प्रारम्भ, समाप्ति तथा इन्टरवल (Start, Finish and Interval)प्रति-दिन खेल निश्चित समय पर शुरू होगा। खेल की अवधि प्रायः 5, 55 या 6 घंटे की होती है। पहले दो घंटे के खेल के बाद 45 मिनट के लिए भोजन का इन्टरवल (Lunch Interval) हो जाता है। इसके बाद दो घंटे के खेल के बाद 20 मिनट का चाय के लिए इन्टरवल (Tea Interval) होता है। प्रत्येक पारी के बीच 10 मिनट तथा प्रत्येक नए बैट्समैन के आने के लिए अधिक-से-अधिक 2 मिनट का समय दिया जाता है।

प्रश्न
क्रिकेट खेल में निम्नलिखित से आप क्या समझते हैं ?
फलांकन, सीमाएं, गेंद का गुम होना, ओवर, विकेट का गिरना, मृत बाल, नो बाल, वाइड बाल, बाई, लैग बाई, बाऊल्ड, कैच, एल० बी० डब्ल्यू, स्टम्पड, रन आउट।
उत्तर-
फलांकन (Score)—फलांकन (Score) के लिए दौड़ों (रनों) की गिनती की जाती है। जब बैट्समैन गेंद को हिट करने के बाद एक छोर (सिरे) से दूसरे छोर (सिरे) पर पहुंचे बिना ही रास्ते में से लौट जाता है तो वह दौड़ (रन) नहीं गिनी जाएगी। इसे शार्ट रन (Short Run) कहते हैं। यदि रन बनाते समय बाल हवा में हो और वह लपक लिया जाए तो वह ‘रन’ (दौड़) गिनी नहीं जाएगी। इसी प्रकार यदि बैट्समैन ‘रन’ बनाते समय आऊट (Run out) हो जाए तो उस ‘रन’ को भी गिना नहीं जाएगा।

सीमाएं (Boundaries) खेल की सीमाएं सफेद रंग द्वारा अंकित की जानी चाहिएं। यदि बैट्समैन के हिट करने पर गेंद मैदान को छूती हुई सीमा रेखा के पार चली जाती है तो इसे बाऊण्डरी कहते हैं। बाऊण्डरी के लिए 4 दौड़ें (र.) दी जाती हैं। हां, यदि हिट की गई गेंद सीमा रेखा के बाहर गिरती है (भले ही उसे फील्डर ने छू लिया हो) तो इसे ‘छक्का’ (Sixer) कहते हैं। छक्के में 6 दौड़ें होती हैं। यदि बाऊण्डरी ओवर थ्रो के कारण हो तो बने हुए रन तथा बाऊण्डरी के ‘रन’ स्कोर में जोड़े जाएंगे।
गेंद का गुम होना (Loss of Ball)-यदि खेल के दौरान गेंद गुम हो जाती है तो स्कोर में 6 ‘रन’ जोड़ दिए जाएंगे। परन्तु गेंद गुम होने से पहले 6 से अधिक रन बने हों तो उतनी ही रने’ जोड़ी जाएंगी जितनी कि बनाई जा चुकी हों।
‘ परिणाम (Result) जो भी टीम दो पारियों (इनिंग) में अधिक दौडें बना लेती है उसे विजयी माना जाएगा। एक दिन के मैच में एक पारी पर फैसला होगा। यदि मैच पूरा न हो सके तो वह बराबर माना जाता है। ओवर में 6 या 8 बार गेंद फेंकी जाएगी। ये ओवर विकट के सिरे से बारी-बारी दिए जाते हैं। ‘नो-बाल’ तथा ‘वाइड-बाल’ ओवर में नहीं गिने जाएंगे। एक इनिंग में कोई भी बाऊलर लगातार दो ओवर नहीं कर सकता।
ओवर (Over)—एक ओवर में 6 बार गेंद फेंकी जाएगी। यह ओवर विकेट के सिरे पर बारी-बारी दिए जाते हैं। ‘No Ball’ तथा ‘Wide Ball’ ओवर में नहीं गिने जाएंगे। एक इनिंग में कोई भी ‘Bowler’ निरन्तर दो ‘Overs Bowl’ नहीं कर सकता।
मृत बाल (Dead Ball)-गेंद निम्नलिखित दशाओं में मृत गेंद कहलाएगी—

जब बाऊलर या विकेट कीपर के हाथ में पूरी तरह आ जाए।
सीमा तक पहुंच जाए या ठप्पा खा जाए।
खेलने या न खेलने पर बैट्समैन या अम्पायर के कपड़ों में उलझ जाए।
अम्पायर द्वारा ओवर या ‘समय’ की घोषणा कर दी जाए।
बैट्समैन के आऊट होने पर।

नो बाल (No Ball)—गेंद करते समय यदि गेंदबाज़ का अगला पैर Bowling Crease से आगे चला जाता है या Return Crease को काटता है तो Umpire, No Ball घोषित कर देगा।
बैट्समैन नो बाल पर हिट लगाकर जितनी भी दौड़ें सम्भव हो, बना सकता है। इस प्रकार बनी दौडों को कुल स्कोर में जमा कर लिया जाएगा। यदि कोई भी दौड न बनी हो तो केवल एक दौड़ ही स्कोर में जोड़ी जाएगी। अम्पायर अपनी एक भुजा फैलाकर ‘नो बाल’ का संकेत देता है।

वाइड बाल (Wide Ball)-यदि बाऊलर गेंद को विकेट से उतनी ऊंचाई पर या चौड़ाई पर फेंकता है कि अम्पायर के विचार में यह बैट्समैन की पहुंच से बाहर है तो वह वाइड बाल की घोषणा कर देता है। वाइड बाल के समय बनने वाली दौड़ों की गिनती वाइड बाल में की जाती है। यदि कोई भी दौड़ न बने तो एक दौड़ बनी समझी जाती है।
बाई या लैग बाई (Bye or Leg Bye)–यदि कोई गेंद, जो न ही नो बाल हो और न ही वाइड बाल हो, प्रहारक (स्ट्राइकर) के बैट या शरीर को बिना स्पर्श किए पास से गुज़र जाए और ‘रन’ बन जाए तो अम्पायर, बाई घोषित करता है परन्तु गेंद प्रहारक के बैट वाले हाथ को छोड़कर शरीर के किसी भाग से छू कर पास से गुज़र जाए और ‘रन’ बन जाए तो अम्पायर लैग-बाई घोषित करेगा।

विकेट का गिरना (The Wicket is done) यदि प्रहारक स्वयं या उसका बैट या गेंद स्टम्प्स के ऊपर एक या दोनों गिल्लियां गिरा दे या प्रहार द्वारा भूमि से उखड़ जाए तो विकेट गिरी मानी जाएगी।
अपने क्षेत्र के बाहर (Out of his Ground) बैट्समैन अपने क्षेत्र से बाहर माना जाएगा जब उसके हाथ के बैट का कुछ भाग या उसका शरीर कल्पित मंज रेखा की पीछे ज़मीन पर न हो।
बैट्समैन की निवृत्ति (Batsman Retirement)-बैट्समैन किसी भी समय घायल या बीमारी की दशा में निवृत्त (Retire) हो सकता है। वह बल्लेबाजी तो कर सकता है परन्तु उसको विपक्षी कप्तान की आज्ञा लेनी पड़ेगी कि किस नम्बर पर बल्लेबाज़ी करे।
बाऊल्ड (Bowled)-जब विकेट गेंद मारकर गिरा दी जाए तो प्रहारक बाऊल्ड माना जाएगा। भले ही गेंद उसके बैट या शरीर के भाग से स्पर्श कर चुकी हो।

पकड़ आऊट (कैच आऊट) (Catch Out)-यदि बैट के प्रहार से, या बैट वाले हाथ से (कलाई से नहीं) लग कर ज़मीन छूने से पहले किसी फील्डर द्वारा गेंद लपक ली जाए तो प्रहारक पकड़ आऊट (कैच आऊट) होगा। यदि गेंद विकेट कीपर के पैडों में भी अटके तो भी बैट्समैन पकड़े आऊट माना जाएगा।
गेंद को हाथ लगाना आऊट (Handle the Ball) यदि खेलते समय कोई बैट्समैन हाथों से गेंद को छू लेता है तो उसे गेंद के साथ हाथ लगाना आऊट माना जाएगा।
गेंद पर दो प्रहार (Hit the Ball twice)-प्रहारक (स्ट्राइकर) गेंद पर ‘दो प्रहार’ आऊट होगा यदि गेंद उसके शरीर के किसी भाग से लगकर रुक जाती या वह उस पर जान-बूझ कर पुनः प्रहार करता है। केवल अपनी विकेट के बचाव के लिए ही प्रहार किया जा सकता है।

विकेट पर प्रहार आऊट (Hit Wicket Out) यदि गेंद खेलते समय प्रहारक (Striker) अपने बैट या शरीर के किसी भाग से विकेट मार गिराता है तो इसे ‘विकेट पर प्रहार’ (हिट विकेट) आऊट माना जाएगा। यदि उसकी विकेट टोपी या हैट गिरने या टूटे हुए बैट के किसी भाग के लगने से गिर जाती है तो भी उसे विकेट पर प्रहार आऊट माना जाएगा।
पगबाधा एल० बी० डब्ल्यू० (L.B.W.)(लैग बिफोर विकेट) या पगबाधा आऊटप्रहारक (Striker) उस समय ‘लैग बिफोर विकेट’ (एल० बी० डब्ल्यू०) आऊट माना जाता है जब गेंद को बल्ले से स्पर्श करने से पहले शरीर के किसी भाग से रोकने का यत्न करता है और अम्पायर के अनुसार गेंद विकेट की सीधी रेखा में है और यदि बैट्समैन इसे अपने शरीर के किसी भाग से न रोकता तो गेंद सीधे विकेट पर ही लगती।

क्षेत्र में बाधा (Obstruction) आऊट-कोई भी बैट्समैन ‘क्षेत्र में बाधा’ आऊट हो सकता है यदि वह जान-बूझ कर किसी फील्डर को गेंद पकड़ने से रोकता है।
स्टम्पड (Stumped) आऊट-प्रहारक (Stricker) उस समय ‘स्टम्पड आऊट’ माना जाता है जब बाऊलर द्वारा बाऊल की गई गेंद को प्राप्त करते समय रन बनाने की स्थिति के अतिरिक्त अपने क्षेत्र से बाहर चला जाए और विकेट कीपर विकेट उखाड़ दे या विकेटों के ऊपर रखी गिल्लियां उतार दे।
रन आऊट (Run Out)–जब कोई बैट्समैन दौड़ते समय या जब गेंद खेल में हो अपने क्षेत्र से बाहर चला जाए और कोई फील्डर गेंद मारकर उसकी विकेट गिरा दे और विकेटों के ऊपर से गेंद लगने से गिल्लियां गिर जाएं तो बैट्समैन को रन आऊट माना जाता है। यदि बैट्समैन एक-दूसरे को पार कर जाए तो उस बैट्समैन को आऊट माना जाएगा जो गिरी हुई विकेट की ओर दौड़ रहा है।
विकेट रक्षक (विकेट कीपर) (Wicket Keeper)-विकेट कीपर सदा विकेटों के पीछे रहेगा जब तक कि बाऊलर द्वारा संक्रमित (फेंकी हुई) गेंद बल्ले या प्रहारक के शरीर पर स्पर्श न कर ले या विकेट पार न चली जाए या प्रहारक रन (दौड़) बनाने की कोशिश न करे, वह गेंद को नहीं पकड़ सकता।

क्षेत्र रक्षक (Fielder) क्षेत्र रक्षक (फील्डर) अपने शरीर के किसी भी भाग से गेंद को रोक सकता है। क्षेत्र रक्षक टोपी या रूमाल से गेंद नहीं रोक सकता। यदि वह जानबूझ कर टोपी या रूमाल से गेंद रोकता है तो बनाए हुए रनों में पांच रन और जमा कर दिए जाएंगे। यदि कोई ‘रन’ न बना हो तो ‘रन’ और दिए जाएंगे।
क्षेत्र, मौसम और प्रकाश (Field, Weather and Light)-मैच शुरू होने से पहले टीमों के कप्तान खेल क्षेत्र, मौसम तथा प्रकाश के उचित होने को निश्चित करने के लिए चुनाव करेंगे। यदि इस विषय में पहले सहमति न हो गई हो। यदि किसी प्रकार की सहमति हुई हो तो उसका फैसला अम्पायर करेंगे।

टैस्ट मैच (Test Match)-टैस्ट मैच में दोनों टीमों में से प्रत्येक को दो इनिंग Inning खेलने का अवसर मिलता है। टैस्ट मैच 5 दिनों में खेला जाता है।
एक दिवसीय मैच (One day Match)-एक दिवस के मैच में दोनों टीमों 50-50 ओवरों को बैट करेगी। एक दिवसीय मैच दिन अथवा रात को हो सकता है।
20, 20 मैच (20, 20 Match)—यह एक दिवसीय मैच की तरह है इसे 20, 20 ओवर का मैच कहा जाता है क्योंकि दोनों टीम 20, 20 ओवर ही खेलती है। इस में नए नियम हैं जो इस प्रकार है। फ्री-हिट (Free Hit) जब बाउलर बाउलिंग करीज़ पार करके बाल फेंकता है। उसे नो बाल कहा जाता है। इसमें बैटस मैन को फ्री-हिट मिलती है। इस फ्री-हिट में बैटस मैन आऊट नहीं होगा सिर्फ रन आउट होने पर ही आउट माना जाता है।
बाल आउट (Ball Out)-जब मैच बराबर हो जाता है तो बाल आऊट के द्वारा जीत का फैसला किया जाता है इसमें दोनों टीमों के पांच-पांच खिलाड़ियों को बाल करने का अवसर दिया जाता है। जिसमें कोई बैटस मैन नहीं होता जो टीम अधिक विकट लेती ही जाती मानी जाती है।
पावर प्ले (Power Play)-क्रिकेट में नए नियम लागू हुए हैं जो इस प्रकार हैं। 50 ओवरों में तीन पावर प्ले 10 ओवर, 5 ओवर और 5 ओवर के होने चाहिए। पहले 10 पावर प्ले खेल के आरम्भ में लेने होते हैं 5-5 Overs बैटिंग और फीलडिंग टीम जब चाहे ले सकते हैं।

अपील (Appeal) अम्पायर किसी बैट्समैन को आऊट नहीं देगा जब तक कि किसी फील्डर द्वारा अपील न की गई हो। यह अपील अगली गेंद फेंकने तथा ‘समय’ पुकारने से पहले होनी चाहिए। अपील करते समय फील्डर अम्पायर से कहते हैं। ‘हाऊ इज़ दिस’ (यह कैसे हुआ) अम्पायर आऊट का निर्णय अपनी निर्देशिका अंगुली उठा कर देता है।

प्रश्न
क्रिकेट के खेल में खिलाड़ियों के फील्ड करने की पोजीशन को चित्र द्वारा प्रकट करें।
उत्तर-
क्षेत्र रक्षक की व्यूह रचना (फील्ड सैटिंग)
(CRICKET FIELD)
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 3

प्रायः मैदान में क्षेत्र रक्षक चित्र के अनुसार स्थान ग्रहण करते हैं।

प्रश्न
क्रिकेट खेल के महत्त्वपूर्ण तकनीक लिखें।
उत्तर-
क्रिकेट में बैटिंग निपुणता और तकनीकें
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 5
किसी भी हिट को सफलतापूर्वक खेलने के लिए बैट्समैनों को तीन बातों का ध्यान रखना चाहिए। उसे अवश्य ही पहले बाल को ढूंढ़ना चाहिए और तब निरन्तर बाल की ओर ध्यान रखना चाहिए। उसे यह निर्णय देना होता है कि कौन-सी हिट ठीक है। उस हिट को ठीक तरह से खेलने के लिए अपने बदन को छोड़ना चाहिए।

पहले कहने को तो काफ़ी आसान है परन्तु वास्तव में इतना आसान नहीं है। यह बात सोचनी तो आसान है कि तुम बाल की ओर देख रहे हो। यह वास्तव में किसी आ रहे बाल को देखना आसान है बशर्ते कि तुमने अपना मन बनाया हुआ हो। किन्तु पूरी पारी में प्रत्येक बाल की जांच करने की आदत डालनी, सही अर्थों में जांच करनी एक बड़ा कठिन कार्य है। आप ऐसा केवल अपने हाथ के कार्य पर ध्यान केन्द्रित करना सीख कर ही कर सकते हो। यह वास्तव में बड़ा कठिन है, परन्तु यदि तुम इस प्रकार करना सीख लेते हो तो यह तुम्हें क्रिकेट में ही सहायक सिद्ध नहीं होगा बल्कि जीवन में भी।

अच्छी प्रकार निर्णय करना कि किसी विशेष बाल को किस तरह हिट करना है। यह एक प्रकार से अन्तर प्रेरणा का साधन है, या जिसे प्रायः क्रिकेट में ‘बाल सूझ’ कहा जाता है। कारण यह मुख्यतः अनुभव का कार्य है।
खिलाड़ी की स्थिति
खिलाड़ी की आरामदायक, तनावहीन तथा सन्तुलित स्थिति बनी रहनी आवश्यक है। बाल की ठीक परख करना और प्रत्येक स्ट्रोक के लिए पांव की हिल-डुल इस पर ही निर्भर करती है। पांव साधारणतः क्रीज़ की ओर समानान्तर होने चाहिएं और इनके पंजे लक्ष्य की ओर होने चाहिएं।
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 6
एक ठीक बैक लिफ्ट’ का बहुत महत्त्व है। बायां बाजू और कलाई को ही समस्त कार्य करना चाहिए और बैट को आसानी से लक्ष्य की ओर, जैसे कि बैट उतरता है।
सिर और बदन बिल्कुल स्थिर होने चाहिएं। उभार के सिरे पर दाईं कुहनी बदन से कुछ पीछे होनी चाहिए और बायां हाथ पैंट की दाईं जेब के बिल्कुल सामने ऊपर की ओर होना चाहिए।
बैट नीचे की ओर इच्छुक हिट की रेखा पर घूमना चाहिए। प्रहार के समय लिफ्ट कुदरती है कि अधिक परिपक्व हो।

सीधे बाल को सामने की सुरक्षा हिट
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 7
सामने की हिट सुरक्षा में न केवल बहुमूल्य है, बल्कि सब हिटों का आधार भी है। इसे ठीक ढंग से खेलना लगभग आधा बाल बैटमैन बनने के तुल्य है। उद्देश्य बाल को जितना प्वाइंट के निकट से निकट सम्भव हो सके, खेलने का है।
सिर आगे की ओर बढ़ाते, बायां कूल्हा और कन्धा बाल की रेखा से बाहर रख कर बाल को बैट पर बाएं पांव से कुछ इंच सामने लेना होता है और पांव मिड ऑफ व एक्स्ट्रा कवर के बीच की सेध में होना चाहिए। बदन का बोझ मुड़े हुए बाएं घुटने से बिल्कुल सामने की ओर हो।
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 8
बाल की समस्त मार्ग परख करो। इस तरह करने के लिए तुम्हें अपना सिर जहां तक हो सके, सन्तुलन में रखना चाहिए। सिर ऊपर उठाने का लोभ कम करो।
हिट में नियन्त्रण आवश्यक है-यदि तुम मज़बूत हिट मारना चाहते हो तो तुम्हारी हिट घूमने की अपेक्षा अधिक अच्छी लम्बी हो सकती है।
बाल को साफ़-साफ़ व आसान ढंग से हिट करने के लिए उसे सीमा (बाऊंडरी) की ओर फेंकने की अपेक्षा मैदान में फेंकना चाहिए।
यदि बाल काफ़ी दूर ऊपर है तो हिट एक ही लम्बे कदम से भरी जा सकती है, मगर तुम्हें पिच पर कम गति, तेज़ व अधूरे (Shorter) बाल को खेलने के लिए पांव का प्रयोग करना भी सीखना चाहिए।
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 9
आफ़ ड्राइव में सबसे आवश्यक बात यह है कि सिर, बायां कन्धा और कमर बाल की रेखा पर होने चाहिएं। यदि वह ठीक दिशा में होंगे तो बायां पांव अपने आप ही ठीक दिशा में काम करेगा। पहुंच से बाहर बाल और साधारण बाल को प्राप्त करने के लिए बाएं कन्धे की पीठ गेंद करने वाले की ओर होनी चाहिए और आफ़ साइड की ओर हिट का लक्ष्य होना चाहिए। वास्तव में अपनी नीचे की ओर गति फाइन लैग की रेखा से आरम्भ करेगा। जहां तक सम्भव हो सके बैट का पूरा भाग हिट की रेखा द्वारा घूमना चाहिए।
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 10
युवकों में आन ड्राइव की योग्यता बहुत ही कम है, मगर यदि वह इसे हासिल कर लें तो अपने रन बनाने की सामर्थ्य को काफ़ी बढ़ा सकते हैं।
इससे पहली हरकत बाएं कन्धे को हल्का-सा नीचे रखना है। इस प्रकार बाएं पांव और सन्तुलन रेखा को ठीक रखने, सिर को आगे की ओर करके बाल की रेखा पर आने की सहायता मिलेगी। बायां पांव रेखा से हल्का-सा दूर होगा।
बैट्समैन को हिट का निशाना लेना चाहिए और अन्तिम बैट की चौड़ाई की ओर से नीचे घूमना चाहिए। बैट्समैन को अपनी आन ड्राइवस दाएं हाथ और दाएं कन्धे से अधिक काम लेने की रुचि को दृढ़ता से कम करना होगा। उसे अपने बाएं कूल्हे को भी दूर होने की आज्ञा नहीं देनी चाहिए।
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 11
जब तक एक बैट्समैन बाल के आकर्षण की अच्छी तरह पड़ताल नहीं कर लेता तो उसे बैक स्ट्रोक से ही खेलना चाहिए और इस प्रकार उसे बाल के आकर्षण के पश्चात् जांच करने का समय भी मिलेगा। हल्की बाल और अधिक कठिन विकट में उसे अवश्य ही बैक स्ट्रोक पर निर्भर करना चाहिए।
दायां पांव क्रीज़ की ओर पंजा समानान्तर रहते बाल की रेखा के भीतर और पीछे की ओर अच्छी तरह हिल-डुल कर सकता है। बदन का बोझ इस पांव पर बदली किया जा सकता है परन्तु सिर आगे की ओर झुका हुआ होना चाहिए। बाएं पांव पर होते हुए एक सन्तुलनीय-सा कार्य करता है।
बाल दृष्टि से कुछ नीचे मिलना चाहिए जोकि जितना सम्भव स्तर हो सके होना चाहिए क्योंकि वह बाल को नीचे पिच की ओर झांकती है। हिट पर नियन्त्रण बाएं हाथ से बाजू की ओर से कोहनी ऊपर उठा कर किया जाता है। दायां हाथ अंगूठे पर अंगुलियों की पकड़ में आरामदायक होता है। बदन को जितना सम्भव हो सके साइडों की ओर रखना चाहिए।

समतल बैट स्ट्रोक
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 12
एक लड़का जब तक सीधी हिट नहीं मारना सीखता तब तक बैट्समैन नहीं बनता परन्तु उसे पूरे भाव से अनुचित बाल से खेलने का ढंग भी होना चाहिए। यह बात विशेष तौर पर लम्बे टिप्पों और पूर्ण उछाल में वास्तविक लगती है और विशेषतः जूनियर क्रिकेट में चौके मारने के उत्तम अवसर प्रदान करती है।
ये हिटें अधिक आसान होती हैं क्योंकि ये सीधी बैट हिटों से अधिक प्राकृतिक होती हैं, परन्तु इनको दृढ़ता से खेलने के लिए तुम्हें चतुराई से खेलने का ढंग सीखना चाहिए।

पिछले पांव का स्कवेयर कट
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 13
बाल रेखा और प्वाइंट पर सामने से या पीछे मिले बाल से निपटने के लिए दायां पांव दाएं कूल्हे के आर-पार घूमता है। तब कलाइयों और हाथों को एक ऊंची बैक लिफ्ट से नीचे घुमाया जाता है और सिर व बदन, झुके हुए दाएं घुटने और स्ट्रोक रेखा में घूमता है।

लेट कट
क्रिकेट (Cricket) Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education 14
यह हिट भी ऊपरी हिट जैसी ही है, सिवाय इसके कि यह बाएं कन्धे के अधिक घुमाव से आरम्भ होती है और दायां पांव थर्ड स्लिप की ओर से पंजे की ओर भूमि पर होता है। बाल विकटों की सतह के बराबर मिलता है और कलाई आगे बढ़ाते बैट्समैन इसे गुल्ली या स्लिप की दिशा में हिट करता है।
इन दोनों कट्स में बायां पांव पंजे पर विश्राम अवस्था में रहता है और बोझ झुके हुए दाएं घुटने पर पूरी तरह रहता है।

PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Practical क्रिकेट (Cricket)

प्रश्न 1.
क्रिकेट के खेल में एक टीम में कितने खिलाड़ी होते हैं ?
उत्तर-
11 खिलाड़ी भाग लेते हैं तथा 5 अतिरिक्त (Substitute) खिलाड़ी होते हैं

प्रश्न 2.
क्रिकेट की गेंद का भार तथा परिधि कितनी होती है ?
उत्तर-
गेंद का भार 155.9 ग्राम (\(5 \frac{1}{2}\) औंस) से 163 ग्राम (\(5 \frac{3}{4}\) औंस) तक तथा परिधि 22.4 सेमी० (\(3 \frac{13}{16}\)) 22.9 सेमी० (9”) तक होती है।

प्रश्न 3.
क्रिकेट के खेल में अधिकारियों की संख्या कितनी होती है ?
उत्तर-

अम्पायर-2
स्कोरर-2

प्रश्न 4.
क्रिकेट के बैट की लम्बाई तथा चौड़ाई कितनी होती है ?
उत्तर-
लम्बाई 96.5 सेमी० तथा अधिक-से-अधिक चौड़ाई 10.8 सेमी० होती है।

प्रश्न 5.
विकटों की एक स्टम्प से दूसरी स्टम्प तक दूरी कितनी होती है ?
उत्तर-
20.12 मीटर या 22 गज।

प्रश्न 6.
डैड बाल से आप क्या समझते हैं ?
उत्तर-
डैड बाल (Dead Ball)

जब गेंद बाऊलर या विकेट कीपर ने ठीक तरह से पकड़ लिया हो।
जब वह सीमा तक पहुंच जाये या ठप्पा खा जाए।
वह खेले या बिना खेले या अम्पायर या बैट्समैन के कपड़ों से उलझ जाए।
बैट्समैन आऊट हो जाये।
गेंद फेंकने वाले के गेंद फिर प्राप्त करने के ऊपर अम्पायर खेल को यदि रोकना चाहे।
अम्पायर द्वारा समय या ओवर की घोषणा करने पर।

नोट-बाऊलर को गेंद फेंकने की क्रिया या दौड़ शुरू करते ही गेंद डैड नहीं रहेगा।

प्रश्न 7.
क्रिकेट में ओवर से क्या अभिप्राय है ?
उत्तर-
ओवर (Over)-प्रायः एक ओवर में 6 बार गेंदें खेली जाती हैं, यदि पहले निश्चित कर लिया जाए तो ओवर में आठ गेंदें भी खेली जा सकती हैं। यदि नो बाल या वाइड बाल हो जाये तो ओवर में एक गेंद और फेंकने की वृद्धि की जाती है। जितने नो बाल उस ओवर में होंगे उतने और गेंद फेंके जाते हैं। यदि अम्पायर से ओवर के बालों की गिनती में भूल हो जाती है तो अम्पायर द्वारा गिना गया ओवर ही माना जायेगा।
भारत में एक ओवर छ: गेंदों का होता है जबकि ऑस्ट्रेलिया में आठ गेंदें होती थीं।

प्रश्न 8.
निम्नलिखित से आप क्या समझते हैंस्टम्पड, बोल्ड, विकेट पर चोट, गेंद को हाथ लगाना, गेंद पर दो चोंटे, रन आऊट, पगबाधा (LBW), नो बाल, वाइड बाल, बाई और लैग बाई।
उत्तर-

स्टम्पड (Stumped)-बैट्समैन के हाथ का बैट या उसका पांव मानी गई भंज-रेखा के पीछे पृथ्वी पर न हो तो वह क्षेत्र से बाहर माना जाता है। यदि विकेट कीपर गेंद विकेट को लगाकर गिल्ली उड़ा दे तो बैट्समैन स्टम्पड आऊट होगा।
बोल्ड (Bowled)-बाऊलर यदि गेंद फेंक कर विकेट गिरा दे तो बैट्समैन Bowled out कहलाता है, चाहे गेंद पहले उसके पैर या शरीर को छू चुकी हो।
विकेट पर चोट (Hit wicket)-विकेट पर चोट खेलते हुए चाहे बैट्समैन के बैट या शरीर के किसी भी भाग को छू कर यदि विकेट या इस पर रखी गिल्ली (Bail) गिर जाए तो वह बैट्समैन आऊट समझा जाएगा।
गेंद को हाथ लगाना (Handled the ball) यदि बैट्समैन खेलता हुआ गेंद को छू ले तो वह आऊट माना जाएगा।
गेंद पर दो चोटें (Hit the Ball twice)-गेंद पर चोट लगाते समय यदि गेंद पर चोट लगाने वाले के शरीर के किसी भी भाग पर लगे या रुक जाए और वह उस पर जानबूझ कर फिर चोट लगाए तो वह गेंद पर चोट वाला आऊट हो जाता है। परन्तु एक शर्त है कि ऐसा विकट के बचाव के लिए न किया गया हो।
रन आऊट (Run out)-जिस समय गेंद मैदान में हो और बैट्समैन भागते हुए अपने क्षेत्र से बहार चला जाए और विरोधी टीम का खिलाड़ी उसकी विकेट गिरा दे तो बैट्समैन रन आऊट हो जाता है।
पगबाधा (LBW)–एक बैट्समैन पगबाधा (LBW) आऊट हो जाता है जबकि उसके शरीर का भी कोई भाग सिवाए हाथ के दोनों विकटों के बिल्कुल सामने हो क्योंकि अम्पायर के विचार में यदि ऐसा न होता तो गेंद सीधा विकटों में लगता है।
नो बाल (No Ball)-जब गेंदबाज का गेंद फेंकते समय एक पैर पॉपिंग क्रीज़ से पीछे और रिटर्न क्रीज़ के मध्य में हो तथा दोनों में से किसी एक को छू रहा हो या उसके ऊपर टिका हो तो नो बाल हो जाता है। नो बाल की एक दौड़ होती है। यदि नो बाल पर बैट्समैन हिट करके कुछ दौड़ें बना ले तो वे दौड़ें बैट्समैन के खाते में जमा होंगी। अम्पायर अपनी एक भुजा फैलाकर नो बाल का संकेत करता है।
वाइड बाल (Wide Ball)–यदि गेंद इतनी ऊंचा या बाहर फेंकी जाए कि वह बैट्समैन की पहुंच से बाहर हो तो उसे वाइड बाल कहते हैं। जो दौड़ें बाल के समय बनें, उन्हें वाइड बाल में गिना जाता है। यदि कोई भी दौड़ न बने तो वह एक दौड़ बनी समझी जाती है। वाइड बाल का संकेत अम्पायर अपनी दोनों भुजाएं फैला कर करता है।
बाई और लैग बाई (Bye and Leg Bye)–यदि गेंद स्ट्राइक लेने वाले ‘बैट्समैन’ के पास से गुज़र जाए तो इसके साथ जितनी दौड़ें बनें उन्हें ‘बाई’ कहते हैं परन्तु नो बाल या वाइड बाल नहीं होना चाहिए। यदि गेंद उसके बैट वाले हाथ को छोड़ शरीर के किसी दूसरे अंग के साथ छू कर दूर चला जाता है और इतनी देर में कोई दौड़ बन जाए उसे लैग बाई कहते हैं।

प्रश्न 9.
निम्नलिखित से क्या अभिप्राय है
(1) अनिवार्य ओवर
(2) एक दिवसीय मैच।
उत्तर-

अनिवार्य ओवर (Mandatory Over)-मैच समाप्ति के एक घण्टा पहले निर्णायक अनिवार्य ओवर का संकेत देगा। उसके बाद खेल 20 ओवरों तक और खेला जाता है। प्रत्येक ओवर में 6 गेंदें खेली जाती हैं। यदि मैच अनिर्णित प्रतीत हो तो इन 20 ओवरों से पहले भी खेल स्थगित की जा सकती है।
एक दिवसीय मैच-राष्ट्रीय तथा अन्तर्राष्ट्रीय स्तर पर एक दिवसीय टेस्ट मैच होता है जिसमें दोनों टीमें 40-40 या 50-50 ओवर खेलती हैं। जो टीम अधिक रन बनाती है वह जीत जाती है।

PSEB 11th Class Sociology Solutions Chapter 6 समाजीकरण

September 20, 2024September 19, 2024 by Prasanna

Punjab State Board PSEB 11th Class Sociology Book Solutions Chapter 6 समाजीकरण Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 11 Sociology Chapter 6 समाजीकरण

पाठ्य-पुस्तक के प्रश्न (Textual Questions)

I. निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर 1-15 शब्दों में दीजिए :

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण से आप क्या समझते हो ?
उत्तर-
वह प्रक्रिया जिसके द्वारा व्यक्ति समाज में रहने के तथा जीवन जीने के तरीके सीखता है।

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण के स्तरों के नाम लिखो।
उत्तर-
बाल अवस्था, शैशवास्था, किशोरावस्था, युवावस्था तथा वृद्धावस्था।

प्रश्न 3.
किशोरावस्था क्या है ?
उत्तर-
वह अवस्था जो 12-13 वर्ष से शुरू होकर 18-19 वर्ष तक चलती है तथा व्यक्ति में शारीरिक परिवर्तन आते हैं।

प्रश्न 4.
शिशु अवस्था क्या है ?
उत्तर-
वह अवस्था जो पैदा होने से शुरू होकर एक-डेढ़ वर्ष तक चलती है तथा बच्चा अपनी आवश्यकताओं के लिए अन्य लोगों पर निर्भर होता है।

प्रश्न 5.
समाजीकरण की प्राथमिक अभिकरण (संस्थाएं) कौन-सी हैं ?
उत्तर-
परिवार, स्कूल तथा खेल समूह समाजीकरण के प्राथमिक साधन हैं।

प्रश्न 6.
समाजीकरण की औपचारिक संस्था के दो उदाहरण लिखो।
उत्तर-
सरकार, न्यायालय, कानून, राजनीतिक व्यवस्था इत्यादि।

प्रश्न 7.
समाजीकरण की अनौपचारिक संस्था के दो उदाहरण लिखो।
उत्तर-
परिवार, संस्थाएं, धर्म, खेल-समूह इत्यादि।

II. निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर 30-35 शब्दों में दीजिए :

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण को परिभाषित कीजिए।
उत्तर-
बोर्गाडस (Bogardus) के अनुसार, “समाजीकरण वह प्रक्रिया है जिसके द्वारा व्यक्ति मानवीय कल्याण के लिए निश्चित रूप से मिलकर व्यवहार करना सीखते हैं तथा ऐसा करने से वह आत्मनियन्त्रण, सामाजिक उत्तरदायित्व तथा संतुलित व्यक्तित्व का अनुभव करते हैं।”

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण के स्तरों को लिखिए।
उत्तर-

शिशु अवस्था (Infancy)
बचपन अवस्था (Childhood stage)
किशोरावस्था (Adolescent stage)
युवावस्था (Adulthood stage)
वृद्धावस्था (Old age)।

प्रश्न 3.
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया में परिवार की भूमिका पर विचार-विमर्श करो।
उत्तर-
व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण में परिवार का विशेष स्थान है। बच्चे के अचेतन मन पर जो प्रभाव परिवार का पड़ता है वह किसी और का नहीं पड़ता है। परिवार में बच्चा कई प्रकार की भावनाओं जैसे कि प्यार, हमदर्दी इत्यादि सीखता है। परिवार ही बच्चे को परंपराएं, रीति-रिवाज, कीमतें, रहने-सहने के तरीके सिखाता है जिससे उसका समाजीकरण होता है।

प्रश्न 4.
समाजीकरण की तीन औपचारिक संस्थाएं लिखो।
उत्तर-
पुलिस, कानून और राजनीतिक व्यवस्था समाजीकरण के तीन औपचारिक साधन हैं। अगर कोई व्यक्ति अपराध करता है तो पुलिस उसे पकड़ लेती है। फिर कानूनों की सहायता से उस व्यक्ति को कठोर सज़ा दी जाती है। हमारी राजनीतिक व्यवस्था कठोर कानूनों का निर्माण करती है ताकि व्यक्ति अपराध न करें। इस प्रकार इनसे डर कर व्यक्ति अपराध नहीं करता और उसका समाजीकरण हो जाता है।

प्रश्न 5.
प्राथमिक समाजीकरण को संक्षिप्त रूप में लिखो।
उत्तर-
परिवार तथा खेल समूह व्यक्ति का प्राथमिक समाजीकरण करते हैं। परिवार में रह कर बच्चा समाज में रहने के, जीवन जीने के तौर-तरीके सीखता है तथा समाज का अच्छा नागरिक बनता है। खेल समूह में रहकर उसे पता चलता है कि उसकी तरह अन्य बच्चे भी हैं तथा उनका ध्यान भी रखना पड़ता है। इस तरह उसका समाजीकरण होता रहता है।

प्रश्न 6.
मास मीडिया समाजीकरण की संस्था है चर्चा करो।
उत्तर-
आजकल व्यक्ति के जीवन में मास मीडिया का महत्त्व काफ़ी बढ़ गया है। अलग-अलग समाचार-पत्र, खबरों के चैनल लगातार 24 घण्टे चलते रहते हैं तथा हमें अलग-अलग प्रकार की जानकारी देते हैं। इनसे हमें संसार में होने वाली घटनाओं के बारे में पता चलता रहता है जिससे उसका समाजीकरण होता रहता है।

III. निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर 75-85 शब्दों में दीजिए :

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण की विशेषताओं पर विचार-विमर्श कीजिए।
उत्तर-

समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया एक सर्वव्यापक प्रक्रिया है जो प्रत्येक समाज में एक जैसे रूप में ही मौजूद है।
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया एक सीखने वाली प्रक्रिया है जिसमें व्यक्ति तमाम आयु सीखता रहता है।
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के अलग-अलग स्तर होते हैं तथा इसके अलग-अलग स्तरों में सीखने की प्रक्रिया भी अलग-अलग होती है।
जवान होने के पश्चात् समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया में सीखने की प्रक्रिया कम हो जाती है परन्तु यह मृत्यु तक चलती रहती है।
समाजीकरण के बहुत से साधन होते हैं परन्तु परिवार सबसे महत्त्वपूर्ण साधन होते हैं जो उसमें महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिका निभाता है।

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण में क्रीड़ा समूह की महत्ता क्या है ?
उत्तर-
परिवार के बाद समाजीकरण के साधन के रूप में क्रीड़ा समूह की बारी आती है। बच्चा घर से बाहर निकलकर अपने मित्रों के साथ खेलने जाता है तथा क्रीड़ा समूह बनाता है। खेल समूह में ही बच्चे की सामाजिक शिक्षा शुरू हो जाती है। यहाँ वह सब कुछ सीखता है जो वह परिवार में नहीं सीख सकता। यहाँ उसे अपनी इच्छाओं का त्याग करना पड़ता है तथा उसे पता चल जाता है कि उसकी तरह अन्य लोगों की भी इच्छाएं होती हैं। खेल समूह में समानता वाले संबंध होते हैं। इसलिए जब वह क्रीड़ा समूह में भाग लेता है तो वह वहाँ अनुमान तथा . सहयोग सीखता है। यह उसके भविष्य पर प्रभाव डालते हैं। यहाँ उसमें नेता जैसे गुण उत्पन्न हो जाते हैं। खेलते समय बच्चे लड़ते भी हैं। साथ ही वह दूसरों के अधिकारों की रक्षा करना भी सीखते हैं। इस प्रकार समाजीकरण में खेल समूह का काफ़ी महत्त्व है।

प्रश्न 3.
युवावस्था तथा वृद्धावस्था में समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया को दर्शाइए।
उत्तर-
युवावस्था-समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया में इस स्तर का काफ़ी महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान है। इस अवस्था में वह दूसरों के साथ अनुकूलन करना सीखता है। यहाँ उसके आगे जीवन का सबसे महत्त्वपूर्ण प्रश्न पेशा ढूंढ़ना होता है। पेशा ढूंढ़ते समय इसे कई स्थानों पर नकार दिया जाता है परन्तु वह हार नहीं मानता तथा लगातार प्रयास करता है। इससे वह काफ़ी कुछ सीखता है। विवाह तथा बच्चे होने के पश्चात् उसकी भूमिकाएं बदल जाती हैं जो उसे काफी कुछ सिखाती हैं।

वृद्धावस्था-इस अवस्था में आकर उसे जीवन के नए पाठ सीखने पड़ते हैं। उसे पता चल जाता है कि अब वह अपने परिवार पर निर्भर है, उसे कई प्रकार की बीमारियां लग जाती हैं तथा उसे जीवन से नए ढंग से अनुकूलन करना सीखना पड़ता है। उसे अपने बच्चों के अनुसार जीवन व्यतीत करना पड़ता है जिससे कई प्रकार की समस्याएं उत्पन्न हो जाती हैं तथा वह इनसे तालमेल बिठाने का प्रयास करता रहता है।

IV. निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर 250-300 शब्दों में दें:

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के द्वारा एक व्यक्ति के विकास पर विचार-विमर्श कीजिए।
उत्तर-
व्यक्ति समाज में रहने के योग्य कैसे बनता के यह लोगों एवं पदार्थों के सम्पर्क में आने से बनता है। जब एक बच्चा पैदा होता है तो उसमें कोई भी सामाजिक कार्य करने की योग्यता नहीं होती और वह अपने आसपास की वस्तुओं के प्रति अनजान सा होता है। परन्तु धीरे-धीरे वह अपने आस-पास की वस्तुओं की तरफ़ ध्यान देने लग पड़ता है। बच्चा आरम्भ में जिन व्यक्तियों के द्वारा घिरा रहता है उन्हीं के कारण ही सामाजिक व्यक्ति बन जाता है क्योंकि यही उसके आस-पास के व्यक्ति उसको रहने-सहने के बारे में सिखाते हैं और रहन-सहन के नियम बताते हैं। वह दूसरों का अनुसरण करता है और अपने एवं दूसरों के कार्यों की तुलना करता है।

धीरे-धीरे अपने अनुभव से वह सीखता है कि अन्य लोग भी उसी की तरह हैं और अपनी भावनाएं एवं आनन्द दूसरों को दिखाता है। यह वह उस समय करता है जब उसको महसूस होता है कि अन्यों की भी उस की तरह ही भावनाएं हैं। इस तरह जब वह इधर-उधर घूमने लगता है तो वह प्रत्येक वस्तु जो उसको सामने आती है को जानने की कोशिश करता है कि वह क्या है? और क्यों है इस तरह माता-पिता इशारों से बच्चों को अवस्थाओं के बारे में समझाते हैं कि वह चीज़ गलत है और वह चीज़ ठीक है। धीरे-धीरे बच्चे को मन्दिर जाना, स्कूल जाना, शिक्षा आदि के बारे में बताया जाता है उसको स्कूल भेजा जाता है, जहां पर वह अन्य अवस्थाओं के बारे में अनुकूलन करना सीखता है और ज़िन्दगी के प्रत्येक उस तरीके को सीखता है, जो उसके जीवन जीने के लिये आवश्यक हैं। इस तरह समाज में एक सदस्य धीरे-धीरे बड़ा होकर समाज के नियमों को सीखता है।

बच्चे का सबसे पहला सम्बन्ध अपने परिवार के साथ होता है। पैदा होने के बाद उसकी सबसे पहली आवश्यकता उसकी भौतिक आवश्यकताएं, भूख, प्यास इत्यादि होती हैं। उसकी रुचि अपनी मां में सबसे अधिक होती है क्योंकि वह उसकी भौतिक आवश्यकताएं पूरी करती है। मां के पश्चात् ही परिवार के अन्य सदस्य पिता, भाई, बहन, चाचा-चाची, दादा-दादी आते हैं। ये सभी सदस्य उसको संसार के बारे में बताते हैं जिसमें उसको अपना सम्पूर्ण जीवन व्यतीत करना होता है और परिवार में ही रहकर उसे प्यार, शक्ति, अधिकार आदि वस्तुओं का अनुभव होता है क्योंकि यह सब कुछ उसे परिवार में ही मिलता है।

आरम्भ में बच्चे को जो भी कुछ चीज़ उसे पसन्द होती है वह उसे प्राप्त करना चाहता है क्योंकि वह उस पर अपना अधिकार समझता है। वस्तुएं न मिलने पर वह रोता है और ज़िद्द भी करता है। दो या तीन वर्ष की आयु में आते-आते उसे समझ आने लग जाती है कि जिन वस्तुओं पर वह अधिकार समझता है वह किसी और की भी हो सकती हैं और वह उसको प्राप्त नहीं कर सकता। वह मनमानी करने की कोशिश भी करता है तो उसकी माता उसे शुरू में मना करती है। आरम्भ में वस्तुओं की प्राप्ति न होने से उसे निराशा अनुभव होती है। परन्तु धीरेधीरे वह अपनी निराशा पर नियन्त्रण रखने लगता है। बच्चा अपनी आवश्यकताओं की पूर्ति के लिए परिवार पर निर्भर करता है जिनके लिए उसे अपने परिवार का सहयोग प्राप्त करना आवश्यक होता है। उनका सहयोग उसे स्वयं नियंत्रण से ही प्राप्त हो जाता है और वह समाज के प्रतिमानों, परिमापों का आदर करना सीखता है जो कि उसके लिये समाज में रहने एवं व्यवहार करने के लिये आवश्यक है।

जब व्यक्ति का विकास होता है तो वह समाज के तौर तरीके, शिष्टाचार, बोल-चाल, उठने-बैठने एवं व्यवहार करने के तरीके सीखता है। इसके साथ ही उसके स्वैः (Self) का विकास होता है। जब व्यक्ति अपने कार्यों के प्रति चेतन हो जाता है तो इसे चेतना का स्वैः (Self) कहते हैं। आरम्भ में वह अपने एवं पराये में भेदभाव नहीं समझता, क्योंकि उसे दुनियादारी व रिश्तों का पता नहीं होता। परन्तु धीरे-धीरे जब वह अन्यों एवं परिवार के अन्य सदस्यों के साथ अन्तक्रिया करता है तो इस बारे में भी सीख जाता है। परिवार के सदस्यों के पश्चात् उसके अन्य साथी या मित्र मिलते हैं। यह मित्र अलग-अलग अवस्थाओं में पलकर बड़े हुए होते हैं। इन सभी साथियों के भिन्नभिन्न आदर्श होते हैं और बच्चा धीरे-धीरे इनको सीखता है और कठिन अवस्थाओं से तालमेल करता है जोकि समाजीकरण की ही एक प्रक्रिया का नाम है। यहां पर बच्चे की ज़िन्दगी में एक अन्य महत्त्वपूर्ण परिवर्तन आता है, जब वह स्कूल में पढ़ने के लिये जाता है। स्कूल में उसके ऊपर अन्य विद्यार्थियों एवं अध्यापकों के आचरण का प्रभाव पड़ता है। इस प्रकार वह कॉलेज के प्रोफ़ैसरों से नौजवान लड़के एवं लड़कियों से उठना बैठना, विचार करना, व्यवहार करने के तरीके सीखता है जो कि उसकी आगे की ज़िन्दगी के लिये आवश्यक हैं।

कॉलेज के बाद व्यवसाय, विवाह इत्यादि के साथ उसका समाजीकरण होता है जो इस कार्य में महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिका निभाते हैं। पति पत्नी का एक-दूसरे के व्यक्तित्व पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। विवाहोपरान्त व्यक्ति को कई नई जिम्मेदारियां जैसे-पति और पिता की देखभाल करनी पड़ती है। यह नयी जिम्मेदारियां उसे काफ़ी कुछ सिखाती हैं। इस प्रकार समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया उसके जन्म से लेकर मृत्यु तक चलती रहती है। व्यक्ति यद्यपि मर जाता है, परन्तु समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया समाप्त नहीं होती।

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण के विभिन्न स्तरों के बारे में लिखिए।
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया काफ़ी व्यापक होती है। यह बच्चे के जन्म से ही आरम्भ हो जाती है। बच्चा जब जन्म लेता है तो वह पशु से अधिक कुछ नहीं होता है। क्योंकि उसे समाज के तौर-तरीकों का ज्ञान नहीं होता है। परन्तु जैसे-जैसे बच्चा बड़ा होता है, उसकी समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया भी साथ-साथ चलती रहती है और वह सामाजिक जीवन के अनुसार ढलता रहता है। वह समाज के आदर्शों, कीमतों, परिमापों, नियमों, विश्वासों एवं प्रेरणाओं को ग्रहण करता रहता है। बच्चा जब जन्म लेता है तो उसमें सहज प्रवृत्ति होती है। परन्तु समाज के सम्पर्क में आने के पश्चात् वह प्रवृत्तियां आदतों में परिवर्तित हो जाती हैं। यह सब कुछ अलग-अलग समय पर होता है। समाजीकरण के अलग-अलग समय पर अलग-अलग स्तर होते हैं जो इस प्रकार हैं-

शिशु अवस्था (Infant Stage)
बचपन अवस्था (Childhood Stage)
किशोरावस्था (Adolescent Stage)
युवावस्था (Adulthood Stage) 5. वृद्धावस्था (Old Age)

1. शिशु अवस्था (Infant Stage)—पहली अवस्था की व्याख्या करते हुए जानसन ने कहा है कि ये अवस्था बच्चे के जन्म से लेकर डेढ़ साल तक ही होती है। इस अवस्था में बच्चा न तो बोल सकता है और न ही चलफिर सकता है। इसके अतिरिक्त वह अपनी आवश्यकताओं की पूर्ति भी स्वयं नहीं कर सकता। उसको अपनी मां पर ही निर्भर रहना पड़ता है। यह अवस्था ऐसी अवस्था होती है कि वह वस्तुओं का विभेदीकरण नहीं कर सकता। भूख, प्यास आदि की आवश्यकता के लिए वह अपने परिवार के सदस्यों पर निर्भर रहता है। जो भी वस्तु उसे अच्छी लगती है वह उस पर नियन्त्रण रखना चाहता है और अधिकार समझता है। पारसन्स ने भी इस अवस्था को आरम्भिक पहचान की अवस्था कहा है। अधिकांश तौर पर वह अपनी मां को पूर्ण तौर पर पहचान लेता है और उसके सम्पर्क में खुशी और आनन्द प्राप्त करता है। उसकी काल्पनिक और वास्तविक अवस्था में कोई अन्तर नहीं होता।

2. बचपन अवस्था (Childhood Stage)-यह अवस्था डेढ़ साल से 12-13 साल तक चलती है। बच्चा इस अवस्था में अच्छी तरह बोलना व चलना सीख लेता है। कुछ सीमा तक वह अपनी आवश्यकताओं की पूर्ति स्वयं करने लग पड़ता है। 2 साल की आयु तक पहुंचते-पहुंचते वह समझने लग पड़ता है कि उसके अतिरिक्त अन्य बच्चों के भी अधिकार हैं और वह जितनी भी कोशिश कर ले सभी वस्तुओं को प्राप्त नहीं कर सकता। अपनी इच्छाओं की पूर्ति न होने पर उसे बार-बार निराशा होती है। इस निराशा के कारण ही वह अपने ऊपर नियन्त्रण रखना सीख जाता है। इस समय में उसे सज़ा और इनाम देकर अच्छी आदतें डालने की कोशिश की जाती है। इस समय में वह प्यार की कीमतें सीख जाता है और अपने परिवार के सदस्यों का अनुकरण करने लग पड़ता है।

इस अवस्था में बच्चा कुछ-कुछ कार्य स्वयं करने लग जाता है। उदाहरण के तौर पर बच्चा जब मलमूत्र करता है या तो वह पहले बता देता है या फिर बाद में इस बारे में सफ़ाई की ओर इशारा करने लग पड़ता है। कई बार ज़ोर से रोने भी लग जाता है। इस अवस्था में वह बोलने भी लग पड़ता है और चलने भी। वह अपनी इच्छाओं पर भी नियन्त्रण रखने लग जाता है। इस अवस्था में इनाम एवं सज़ा (Reward & Punishment) आदि के द्वारा बच्चे को अच्छी आदतों को ग्रहण करने की सीख दी जाती है। उदाहरण के लिए जब बच्चा माता-पिता की आवाज़ सुनकर उनके कहने के अनुसार कार्य करता है तो माता-पिता प्रसन्न होकर उसे इनाम भी देते हैं और कहते हैं कि कितना अच्छा बच्चा है।

दूसरी तरफ़ जब वह कोई गलत कार्य करता है तो उसे गुस्सा किया जाता है और कई बार थप्पड़ भी लग जाता है। इस अवस्था में वह अपने परिवार की कीमतों को ग्रहण करना आरम्भ कर देता है। उसके ऊपर परिवार के दूसरे सदस्यों का भी प्रभाव पड़ने लग जाता है। वह परिवार की कई बातें तो स्वाभाविक रूप में ही सीख जाता है। इसमें वह प्यार लेना एवं प्यार देना भी सीख जाता है। कुछ बातें तो वह नकल करके भी सीख जाता है। नकल करना उसके लिये मनोरंजन का साधन होता है। जैसे वह अपने पिता को अखबार पढ़ते हुए देखता है तो वह स्वयं भी अखबार पढ़ने लग जाता है। इस अवस्था में वह परिवार के विभिन्न सदस्यों को जैसे करते हुए देखता है वह भी उनकी तरह व्यवहार करने लग जाता है। ‘पारसन्स’ ने इस अवस्था को ‘दोहरा कार्य ग्रहण’ करने का भी नाम दिया है। इस अवस्था में बच्चे के अन्दरूनी गुणों का विकास होने लग जाता है व इस प्रकार बच्चे के द्वारा ठीक एवं गलत कार्यों की पहचान करनी भी आरम्भ हो जाती है।’

3. किशोरावस्था (Adolescence)—यह अवस्था 14-15 साल से लेकर 20-21 वर्ष तक चलती है। इस आयु में पहुंचने पर माता-पिता का बच्चों पर नियन्त्रण नहीं रहता क्योंकि बच्चों को भी लगता है कि उन्हें और अधिक स्वतन्त्रता की आवश्यकता है और वह और अधिक स्वतन्त्रता की मांग भी करते हैं। अब उनके अंग विकसित होने लग जाते हैं और इनके अंगों के विकसित होने पर उनमें नयी भावनाएं उत्पन्न होती हैं और व्यवहार के नये ढंग सीखते पड़ते हैं। लड़कियों के लिये यह आवश्यक होता है कि लड़कों से कुछ दूरी पर रहें। दूसरे लिंग के प्रति भी उन्हें पुनः तालमेल की आवश्यकता होती है। इसके साथ-साथ उन्हें यौन, प्यार कीमतों एवं विश्वास आदि के नियमों को सिखाया जाता है। उन पर अधिक ध्यान दिया जाने लगता है जिस कारण उनमें विद्रोह की भावना भी पैदा हो जाती है। उनके अन्दर तेज़ मानसिक संघर्ष चलता रहता है। इस संघर्ष से लड़ते हुए वह आत्म नियन्त्रण करना सीखता है।

4. युवावस्था (Adulthood Stage)-इस अवस्था में व्यक्ति का सामाजिक दायरा किशोरावस्था से काफ़ी बड़ा हो जाता है। व्यक्ति कोई न कोई कार्य करने लग जाता है। यह भी हो सकता है कि वह किसी सामाजिक समूह राजनीतिक दल, क्लब, ट्रेड यूनियन का सदस्य बन जाए। इस अवस्था में उसका विवाह हो जाता है तथा उसके माता-पिता, मित्र, पड़ोसियों के अतिरिक्त वह अपनी पत्नी के साथ भी रिश्ते बनाता है। पत्नी के परिवार के साथ भी तालमेल बिठाना पड़ता है। अब वह किसी पर निर्भर नहीं है बल्कि वह एक ज़िम्मेदार व्यक्ति बन गया है। उसे अलग-अलग प्रकार की भूमिकाएं निभानी पड़ती हैं जैसे कि पति/पत्नी, माता/पिता, घर का मुखिया व देश का नागरिक। उससे एक विशेष प्रकार की भूमिका निभाने की आशा की जाती है तथा वह निभाता भी है जिससे समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया आगे बढ़ती रहती है।

5. वृद्धावस्था (Old Age)-एक उम्रदराज व्यक्ति का जीवन काफ़ी हद तक वातावरण, पेशे, मित्रों तथा कई समूहों की सदस्यता से प्रभावित होता है। उसमें बहुत-सी कीमतों का आत्मसात (internalised) होता है तथा उसे उनसे तालमेल बिठाना सीखना पड़ता है क्योंकि अब वह अधिक शक्तिशाली नहीं रहा है। उसे कई भूमिकाएं मिल जाती हैं जैसे कि सास/ससुर, दादा/दादी, नाना/नानी, रिटायर व्यक्ति इत्यादि। उसे नई परिस्थितियों के साथ तालमेल बिठाना सीखना पड़ता है तथा समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया चलती रहती है।

प्रश्न 3.
समाजीकरण की संस्थाओं को विस्तृत रूप में लिखो।
उत्तर-
1. परिवार (Family)—व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण में परिवार का विशेष स्थान है। कुछ प्रसिद्ध समाज शास्त्रियों के अनुसार एक बच्चे का मन अचेतन अवस्था में होता है और उस अचेतन मन पर जो प्रभाव परिवार का पड़ता है वह किसी और का नहीं पड़ सकता है। इसी प्रभाव के परिणामस्वरूप ही बच्चे के व्यक्तित्व पर और भविष्य पर भी प्रभाव पड़ता है। बचपन में बच्चे का मन इस तरह का होता है कि उसे जिधर भी चाहो मोड़ा जा सकता है। उसके इस कच्चे मन पर प्रत्येक वस्तु का प्रभाव पड़ता है। बच्चे के व्यक्तित्व पर माता-पिता का काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। यदि माता-पिता का बच्चे पर नियन्त्रण काफ़ी सख्त होगा तो बच्चा बड़ा होकर नियंत्रण से बाहर हो सकता है और यदि बच्चे को काफ़ी लाड-प्यार दिया जाएगा तो वह उसके बिगड़ जाने के अवसर काफ़ी हो जाएगा और यदि बच्चे को माता-पिता का प्यार न मिले तो उसके व्यक्तित्व के असन्तुलन का खतरा अधिक होता है।

बच्चे की आरम्भिक शिक्षा का आधार परिवार ही होता है। परिवार में ही बच्चे के मन के ऊपर कई प्रकार की भावनाएं, जैसे प्यार और हमदर्दी का प्रभाव पड़ता है और वह इस प्रकार के कई गुणों को सीखता है। परिवार ही बच्चे को समाज की तथा परिवार की परम्पराओं, रीति-रिवाज, परिमापों एवं कीमतों के बारे में बताता है। बच्चे को परिवार में ही व्यवहार के तरीकों एवं नियमों इत्यादि की शिक्षा दी जाती है। परिवार के बीच में रहकर बच्चा बड़ों का आदर करना और कहना मानना सीखता है। यदि बच्चे के ऊपर माता-पिता का नियन्त्रण है तो इसका अर्थ है व्यक्ति के ऊपर समाज का नियन्त्रण है क्योंकि बच्चे के समाजीकरण के समय बच्चे के माता-पिता ही समाज के प्रतिनिधि होते हैं। परिवार में तो बच्चा कई प्रकार के गुणों को सीखता है जिसके साथ वह समाज या देश का एक ज़िम्मेदार नागरिक बनता है। परिवार में ही बच्चे को अपने विचार प्रकट करने और व्यक्तित्व के विकास करने का अवसर मिलता है।

आरम्भिक काल में बच्चा जो कुछ भी देखता है उसकी ही नकल करनी आरम्भ कर देता है। इस कारण यह परिवार पर ही आधारित होता है कि वह बच्चे को सही दिशा की तरफ ले जाए। कई मनोवैज्ञानिकों के अनुसार, परिवार का प्रभाव बच्चे के अचेतन मन पर काफ़ी अधिक पड़ता है और इसका प्रभाव उसके भविष्य पर पड़ने लग जाता है। उदाहरण के लिये यदि माता-पिता के बीच परिवार में लड़ाई-झगड़ा होता रहता है तो उसका प्रभाव बच्चे के मन पर पड़ता है और वह उनका प्यार नहीं प्राप्त कर सकता। यदि कोई परिवार तलाक या अन्य किन्हीं कारणों से टूट जाते हैं तो इसका प्रभाव बच्चों पर पड़ता है और वह मनोवैज्ञानिक तौर पर तनावपूर्ण रहते हैं। प्यार के दृष्टिकोण से भी वह वंचित रह जाता है। कई बार तो शारीरिक विकास के ऊपर भी इसका प्रभाव पड़ता है। हमदर्दी, प्यार व सहयोग इत्यादि के गुणों से वह दूर हो जाता है क्योंकि परिवार के गुणों के आधार पर ही वह समाज का सदस्य बनता है। इसलिये टूटे हुए परिवारों में इन गुणों की प्राप्ति असम्भव हो जाती है।

इस तरह हम कह सकते हैं कि परिवार ही व्यक्ति के चरित्र एवं व्यक्तित्व का निर्माण करता है। इस तरह समाजीकरण में परिवार का सबसे अधिक महत्त्व होता है।

2. खेल समूह (Play Group)- परिवार के पश्चात् खेल समूह की समाजीकरण के साधन के रूप में बारी आती है। बच्चा अपने परिवार के घेरे में से निकल कर अपने साथियों के साथ खेलने जाता है और खेल समूह बनाता है। खेल समूह में ही बच्चे की सामाजिक शिक्षा आरम्भ हो जाती है। खेल समूह में रह कर बच्चा. वह सब कुछ सीखता है जो वह परिवार में रह कर नहीं सीख सकता। खेल समूह में रह कर वह अपनी इच्छाओं का त्याग करता है और उसे पता चलता है कि उसके अतिरिक्त अन्य बच्चों की भी इच्छाएं होती हैं। इसके अतिरिक्त खेल समूह में सम्बन्ध समानता पर ही आधारित होते हैं। इसलिये बच्चा जब खेल समूह में भाग लेता है तो वह वहां पर अनुशासन एवं सहयोग सीखता है।

यह उसके भविष्य में प्रभाव डालते हैं। इसके साथ हो खेल समूह में ही व्यक्ति में नेता के गुण पैदा होते हैं। खेलते समय बच्चे एक दूसरे के साथ लड़ते-झगड़ते हैं। साथ-साथ अपने और दूसरों के अधिकारों की रक्षा करने के सिद्धान्त को सीखते हैं। यहां पर आकर बच्चे को अपनी भूमिका की योग्यता व अयोग्यता का भी पता चलता है। खेल समूह में ही योग्यता एवं भावनाओं को बच्चा ग्रहण करता है। संक्षेप में बच्चे के बिगड़ने एवं बनने में खेल समूह का काफ़ी बड़ा हाथ होता है। यदि खेल समूह अच्छा है तो बच्चा अच्छा बन जाता है और यदि खेल समूह बुरा है तो उसके बुरे होने की सम्भावना अधिक है।

इस प्रकार खेल समूह का स्वस्थ होना, व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण के लिये आवश्यक होता है। विद्वानों के अनुसार खेल समूह की इतनी महत्ता होती है कि यह व्यक्ति को निम्न स्तर से उच्च स्तर तक उठा लेता है और दूसरी तरफ ऊपर से निम्न स्थिति की तरफ ले जाता है। इसलिये जहां बच्चे में प्यार, हमदर्दी, सहयोग, समानता इत्यादि के गुण पैदा होते हैं वहीं दूसरी तरफ असन्तुलित खेल समूह बच्चे को अपराधों, चोर, शराबी, जुआरी इत्यादि तक बना देता है क्योंकि जो कुछ वह अपने परिवार से नहीं सीख पाता वह सीखने के लिए खेल समूह पर निर्भर रहता है।

3. पड़ोसी (Neibourhood)- व्यक्ति का पड़ोस भी समाजीकरण का एक बहुत बड़ा साधन होता है जब बच्चा परिवार के हाथों से निकल कर पड़ोसियों के पास चला जाता है तो उसे यह पता चलता है कि उसने अन्य लोगों से किस प्रकार का व्यवहार करना है क्योंकि यदि परिवार में रह कर वह गलत व्यवहार करे तो उसको मज़ाक समझ कर टाल दिया जाता है। परन्तु यदि यह व्यवहार वह बाहर करता है तो उसके व्यवहार का बुरा मनाया जाता हैं। पड़ोस के लोगों के साथ उसे लगातार अनुकूलन करके रहना पड़ता है क्योंकि पड़ोस में उसके गलत व्यवहार को सहन नहीं किया जाता। पड़ोस के लोगों के साथ अनुकूलन बनाकर रहना पड़ता है। यही अनुकूलन उसे सम्पूर्ण ज़िन्दगी काम आता है और पता लगता है कि उसने विभिन्न अवस्थाओं में कैसे अनुकूलन करना है। पड़ोस के लोगों के साथ जब वह अन्तःक्रिया करता है तो समाज के नियमों के अनुसार कैसे अनुकूलन करना है यह सीखता है।

4. स्कूल (School)- इसके बाद बारी आती है स्कूल की जो एक असभ्य बच्चे को सभ्य बच्चे का रूप देता है या फिर आप कह सकते हैं कि कच्चे माल को तैयार माल का रूप देता है। स्कूल में ही बच्चे के गुणों का विकास होता है। स्कूल में बच्चा अन्य विद्यार्थियों के संग रहता है और विभिन्न प्रकार के अध्यापकों का भी उसके मन पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। अध्यापक के बोलने, उठने, बैठने, व्यवहार करने, पढ़ाने के तरीकों का उसके मन पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। परन्तु यहां पर एक बात ध्यान देने योग्य होती है कि किसी बच्चे के ऊपर किसी अध्यापक का प्रभाव पड़ता है और कई बच्चे तो अध्यापकों को ही अपना आदर्श मानने लग जाते हैं और उनके अपने व्यक्तित्व पर इसका काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है।

अध्यापक के अतिरिक्त अन्य बच्चे भी उस बच्चे का समाजीकरण करते हैं। उनके साथ रहते हुए उसे कई पद एवं रोल मिलते हैं जो उसको अगले जीवन में काफ़ी मदद करते हैं और बच्चों के साथ बैठने से उनके व्यक्तित्व पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। स्कूल में जाने के साथ बच्चे के खेल समूह और अन्तक्रियाओं का दायरा काफ़ी बढ़ जाता है क्योंकि उसको कई तरह के बच्चे मिलते हैं। स्कूल में बच्चा कई प्रकार के नियम, अनुशासन, परम्पराओं, विषय आदि सीखते हैं जो उसको उसके भविष्य के जीवन में काम आते हैं।

व्यक्ति के व्यक्तित्व पर जहां अध्यापक का प्रभाव पड़ता है। वहां पर उसके आस पड़ोस के लोगों के विचारों का भी प्रभाव पड़ता है। इसके अतिरिक्त सहयोग की भावना भी बढ़ती है। बच्चे एक दूसरे के साथ मिलकर रहते हैं। लड़के एवं लड़कियों के इकट्ठे एक स्कूल में पढ़ने से दोनों के व्यक्तित्व पर विकास होता है। बच्चा स्कूल में पढ़ते हुए विभिन्न प्रकार की जातियों, धर्मों इत्यादि के सम्पर्क में आता है। इसलिए वह विभिन्न समूहों के प्रति विश्वास रखने लग जाता है। बच्चे को इतनी समझ आ जाती है कि किन परिस्थितियों में कैसा व्यवहार करना है।

5. सामाजिक संस्थाएं (Social Institutions)—समाजीकरण में परिवार एवं स्कूल के अतिरिक्त विभिन्न प्रकार की सामाजिक संस्थाएं भी महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिकाएं निभाती हैं। समाज में कई प्रकार की संस्थाएं हैं जो धार्मिक, आर्थिक, राजनीतिक इत्यादि के समाजीकरण में महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिका निभाती हैं। राजनीतिक संस्थाएं व्यक्ति को सरकार या देश के प्रति सही व्यवहार करना सिखाती हैं। आर्थिक संस्थाएं व्यापार करने का तरीका सिखाती हैं। धार्मिक संस्थाएं व्यक्ति में कई प्रकार के सद्गुण जैसे प्यार, हमदर्दी, दया इत्यादि करना सिखाती हैं। प्रत्येक व्यक्ति धर्मानुसार बनाए गए व्यवहार करने के तरीके, रहने-सहने के नियम, विश्वासों इत्यादि को अचेतन मन से स्वीकार करता है। इस प्रकार प्रत्येक समाज या जाति व्यक्ति को समाज में रहने के नियमों की जानकारी देता है। इसके अतिरिक्त कई प्रकार की मनोरंजन संस्थाएं भी व्यक्ति को समाज में क्रियाशील सदस्य बने रहने के लिए प्रेरित करती हैं।

सामाजिक संस्थाओं में आर्थिक, धार्मिक इत्यादि संस्थाओं का प्रभाव आधुनिक समाज में व्यक्ति के व्यक्तित्व पर प्रभाव डालता है। उदाहरण के लिए आर्थिक संस्थाओं को ही ले लीजिए। आर्थिक संस्थाओं के प्रभाव के अधीन व्यक्ति अपना काफ़ी समय व्यतीत करता है क्योंकि जीवित रहने के लिए उसे कमाई की आवश्यकता पड़ती है और कमाई के लिए वह व्यवसाय पर आधारित होता है। व्यक्ति को व्यवसाय उसकी योग्यता के आधार पर ही मिलता है। किसी भी व्यवसाय को अपनाने के लिए व्यक्ति को कुछ नियमों का पालन करना पड़ता है अर्थात् वह अपने आपको स्थिति के अनुकूल बना लेता है। व्यवसाय के क्षेत्र में उसके सम्बन्ध विभिन्न प्रकार के व्यक्तियों से पैदा हो जाते हैं। वह कई व्यक्तियों के सम्पर्क में आता है। इस कारण उसके व्यक्तित्व और चरित्र पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। इसके अतिरिक्त यदि हम राजनीतिक संस्थाओं के ऊपर नज़र डालें तो हम देखते हैं कि आजकल के समय में समाज का कोई क्षेत्र ऐसा नहीं बचा जिसके ऊपर राजनीतिक संस्थाओं का प्रभाव न हो। व्यापार, भाषा, कला, संगीत, शिक्षा, परिवार इत्यादि प्रत्येक प्रकार के समूह के ऊपर कानून का नियंत्रण होता है। व्यक्ति को प्रत्येक स्थान पर कानून का सहारा लेकर ही आगे बढ़ना पड़ता है। इस कारण व्यक्ति अपने व्यवहार को भी इनके अनुसार ढाल लेता है।

6. आवश्यकता (Needs)- मनुष्य की कई प्रकार की सामाजिक एवं शारीरिक आवश्यकताएं होती हैं जिस कारण व्यक्ति को समाज के सदस्यों के साथ तालमेल करना पड़ता है। व्यक्ति अपनी इन आवश्यकताओं की पूर्ति के लिये समाज के द्वारा प्रभावित तरीकों को अपनाता है ताकि उनकी निन्दा न हो सके। इस तरह व्यक्ति समाज से डर कर कार्य करता है और इसके साथ ही व्यक्ति में अनुकूलन की भावना पैदा होती है। .

7. भाषा (Language)- केवल एक भाषा ही है जो बच्चे का इस प्रकार से विकास कर सकती है। आप ज़रा सोचे, यदि बच्चे को भाषा का ही ज्ञान न हो तो वह अपनी भावनाओं, बातों आदि को किसके आगे प्रकट करेगा। भाषा के कारण ही वह (बच्चा) लोगों के सम्पर्क में आता है और उसे अपनी भावनाओं को प्रकट करने का अवसर मिलता है। जैसे-जैसे बच्चा भाषा को सीखता है, वैसे-वैसे ही उसके पास अपनी भावनाओं के प्रकट करने का अवसर मिलता रहता है। भाषा के कारण ही वह अनेक प्रकार के व्यक्तियों के सम्पर्क में आता है और अन्य लोगों से मिलकर अपने सामाजिक दृष्टिकोण को बढ़ाता है। भाषा के कारण ही वह अपनी आवश्यकताओं और अन्य कठिनाइयों की दूसरों को जानकारी देता है।

भाषा के कारण को ही उसका अन्य लोगों के साथ सम्बन्धों का आदान-प्रदान होता है और वह सम्बन्धों को चलाने वाले नियमों के सीखता है। इसके साथ ही उसमें धर्म एवं नैतिकता का विकास होता है। भाषा ही उसे भिन्न-भिन्न प्रकार की भूमिकाएं निभाने के लिये तैयार करती है। भाषा के कारण ही उसे अन्य लोगों के विचारों का पता चलता है। इससे उसे पता चलता है कि समाज में उसकी क्या स्थिति है इस कारण भाषा के द्वारा ही उसका काफ़ी समाजीकरण होता है।

भाषा के द्वारा ही व्यक्ति के व्यक्तित्व का विकास होता है। इस भाषा के प्रयोग के कारण ही बच्चा दूसरों के सम्पर्क में आता है और वह सामाजिक सम्बन्धों, परिमापों, नियमों, सिद्धान्तों को कहना आरम्भ कर देता है। संक्षेप में, हम कह सकते हैं कि व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण के लिए प्रत्येक प्रकार के छोटे-छोटे समूह और बड़े समूह महत्त्वपूर्ण होते हैं। व्यक्ति जैसे-जैसे, भिन्न-भिन्न क्षेत्रों के सम्पर्क में आता है, वैसे-वैसे उसका समाजीकरण भी होता है। वह अपने व्यवहारों को चेतन एवं अचेतन रूप में बदल लेता है। व्यक्ति अपनी सम्पूर्ण ज़िन्दगी ही कुछ न कुछ सीखता रहता है। अंत में हम कह सकते हैं कि समाज में और भी छोटे-बड़े समूह हैं, जो बच्चे के समाजीकरण में महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिका निभाते हैं। जिनका वर्णन करना यहां पर मुमकिन नहीं, परन्तु फिर भी इनकी भूमिका को नकारा नहीं जा सकता।

प्रश्न 4.
व्यक्ति के विकास के विभिन्न स्तरों तथा समाजीकरण की संस्थाओं के मध्य संबंधों पर चर्चा कीजिए।
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया काफ़ी व्यापक होती है। यह बच्चे के जन्म से ही आरम्भ हो जाती है। बच्चा जब जन्म लेता है तो वह पशु से अधिक कुछ नहीं होता है। क्योंकि उसे समाज के तौर-तरीकों का ज्ञान नहीं होता है। परन्तु जैसे-जैसे बच्चा बड़ा होता है, उसकी समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया भी साथ-साथ चलती रहती है और वह सामाजिक जीवन के अनुसार ढलता रहता है। वह समाज के आदर्शों, कीमतों, परिमापों, नियमों, विश्वासों एवं प्रेरणाओं को ग्रहण करता रहता है। बच्चा जब जन्म लेता है तो उसमें सहज प्रवृत्ति होती है। परन्तु समाज के सम्पर्क में आने के पश्चात् वह प्रवृत्तियां आदतों में परिवर्तित हो जाती हैं। यह सब कुछ अलग-अलग समय पर होता है। समाजीकरण के अलग-अलग समय पर अलग-अलग स्तर होते हैं जो इस प्रकार हैं-

शिशु अवस्था (Infant Stage)
बचपन अवस्था (Childhood Stage)
किशोरावस्था (Adolescent Stage)
युवावस्था (Adulthood Stage) 5. वृद्धावस्था (Old Age)

समाजीकरण की संस्थाओं को विस्तृत रूप में लिखो।
1. परिवार (Family)—व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण में परिवार का विशेष स्थान है। कुछ प्रसिद्ध समाज शास्त्रियों के अनुसार एक बच्चे का मन अचेतन अवस्था में होता है और उस अचेतन मन पर जो प्रभाव परिवार का पड़ता है वह किसी और का नहीं पड़ सकता है। इसी प्रभाव के परिणामस्वरूप ही बच्चे के व्यक्तित्व पर और भविष्य पर भी प्रभाव पड़ता है। बचपन में बच्चे का मन इस तरह का होता है कि उसे जिधर भी चाहो मोड़ा जा सकता है। उसके इस कच्चे मन पर प्रत्येक वस्तु का प्रभाव पड़ता है। बच्चे के व्यक्तित्व पर माता-पिता का काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। यदि माता-पिता का बच्चे पर नियन्त्रण काफ़ी सख्त होगा तो बच्चा बड़ा होकर नियंत्रण से बाहर हो सकता है और यदि बच्चे को काफ़ी लाड-प्यार दिया जाएगा तो वह उसके बिगड़ जाने के अवसर काफ़ी हो जाएगा और यदि बच्चे को माता-पिता का प्यार न मिले तो उसके व्यक्तित्व के असन्तुलन का खतरा अधिक होता है।

वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न

I. बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न (Multiple Choice Questions) :

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण में आपस में क्या मिल जाता है ?
(A) विचार
(B) खाना-पीना
(C) संस्कृति
(D) कोई नहीं।
उत्तर-
(C) संस्कृति।

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण में सबसे अधिक प्रभाव किसका होता है ?
(A) व्यक्ति
(B) समाज
(C) परिवार
(D) समूह।
उत्तर-
(C) परिवार।

प्रश्न 3.
समाजीकरण का आवश्यक तत्त्व क्या है ?
(A) संस्कृति को ग्रहण करना
(B) भाषा
(C) रहने का ढंग
(D) समाज।
उत्तर-
(A) संस्कृति को ग्रहण करना।

प्रश्न 4.
किसके बिना समाजीकरण नहीं हो सकता है ?
(A) रहने का ढंग
(B) भाषा
(C) शरीर
(D) योग्यता।
उत्तर-
(B) भाषा।

प्रश्न 5.
व्यक्ति का समाजीकरण कब आरम्भ होता है ?
(A) जन्म के साथ
(B) भाषा सीखने के पश्चात्
(C) 5 वर्ष की आयु के पश्चात्
(D) 10 वर्ष की आयु में।
उत्तर-
(A) जन्म के साथ।

प्रश्न 6.
समाजीकरण कब समाप्त होता है ?
(A) विवाह के पश्चात्
(B) 50 वर्ष की आयु में
(C) मृत्यु के साथ
(D) रिटायरमेंट के पश्चात्।
उत्तर-
(C) मृत्यु के साथ।

प्रश्न 7.
‘Social Self का समाजीकरण का सिद्धान्त किसने दिया ?
(A) मीड
(B) दुर्थीम
(C) कूले
(D) वैबर।
उत्तर-
(C) कूले।

प्रश्न 8.
Id, Ego and Super Ego का समाजीकरण में प्रयोग किसने किया ?
(A) कूले
(B) फ्राइड
(C) मर्टन
(D) वैबर।
उत्तर-
(B) फ्राइड।

प्रश्न 9.
किस क्रिया के द्वारा संस्कृति एक पीढ़ी से दूसरी को हस्तान्तरित की जाती है ?
(A) संस्कृतिकरण
(B) सात्मीकरण
(C) समाजीकरण
(D) पर संस्कति ग्रहण।
उत्तर-
(C) समाजीकरण।

प्रश्न 10.
इनमें से कौन-सी समाजीकरण की विशेषता है ?
(A) उम्र भर की प्रक्रिया
(B) सीखने की प्रक्रिया
(C) सभा एवं स्थान सापेक्ष
(D) A + B + C.
उत्तर-
(D) A + B + C.

प्रश्न 11.
बच्चे का सर्वप्रथम सम्बन्ध किसके साथ होता है ?
(A) परिवार
(B) देश
(C) समाज
(D) दुनिया।
उत्तर-
(A) परिवार।

प्रश्न 12.
समाजीकरण की कितनी अवस्थाएं हैं ?
(A) एक
(B) दो
(C) तीन
(D) चार।
उत्तर-
(D) चार।

प्रश्न 13.
व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण का सबसे बढ़िया साधन है ?
(A) परिवार
(B) पड़ोसी
(C) समाज
(D) खेल समूह।
उत्तर-
(A) परिवार।

प्रश्न 14.
किस प्रक्रिया के साथ बच्चा समाज के बीच रहने के सभी नियम, परिमाप व्यवहार करने के तरीके सीखता है ?
(A) समाजीकरण
(B) पर संस्कृति ग्रहण
(C) संस्कृतिकरण
(D) सात्मीकरण।
उत्तर-
(A) समाजीकरण।

II. रिक्त स्थान भरें (Fill in the blanks) :

1. ……….. की प्रक्रिया पैदा होने के साथ ही शुरू हो जाती है।
2. समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया ………….. होने पर ही खत्म होती है।
3. ………….. का अर्थ है, व्यक्ति की विशेष पहचान।
4. स्कूल, कानून, समाजीकरण के ……….. साधन हैं।
5. …….. समाजीकरण का सबसे प्राथमिक साधन है।
6. ……….. अवस्था के पश्चात् युवा अवस्था आती है। . ‘
उत्तर-

समाजीकरण,
मृत्यु,
स्व:,
औपचारिक,
परिवार,
किशोर।

III. सही गलत (True/False) :

1. समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया जन्म से ही शुरू हो जाती है।
2. समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के पाँच स्तर होते हैं।
3. समाजीकरण का मुख्य उद्देश्य व्यक्ति को असामाजिक बनाना है।
4. समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया सीखने की प्रक्रिया नहीं है।
5. स्कूल में बच्चा समाज में रहने के ढंग सीखता है।
6. खेल समूह में बच्चे में नेता बनने की भावनाएं जागृत होती हैं।
उत्तर-

सही,
सही,
गलत,
गलत,
सही,
सही।

IV. एक शब्द/पंक्ति वाले प्रश्न उत्तर (One Wordline Question Answers) :

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण क्या होता है ?
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया सीखने की वह प्रक्रिया है जिसमें बच्चा समाज में रहने के सारे नियम, परिमाप, व्यवहार करने के तरीके सीखता है।

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया का मुख्य उद्देश्य क्या होता है ?
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया का मुख्य उद्देश्य व्यक्ति को सामाजिक व्यक्ति बनाना है ताकि वह समाज का एक नागरिक बन कर रह सके।

प्रश्न 3.
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया कब शुरू होती है ?
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया जन्म से ही शुरू होती है।

प्रश्न 4.
बच्चे के समाजीकरण का सबसे महत्त्वपूर्ण साधन क्या होता है ?
उत्तर-
बच्चे के समाजीकरण का सबसे महत्त्वपूर्ण साधन परिवार होता है।

प्रश्न 5.
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के कितने स्तर होते हैं ?
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया में पाँच स्तर होते हैं।

प्रश्न 6.
बाल अवस्था कब शुरू तथा खत्म होती है ?
उत्तर-
बाल अवस्था बच्चे के जन्म से 1-12 साल तक चलती है।

प्रश्न 7.
बचपन अवस्था कब शुरू तथा कब खत्म होती है ?
उत्तर-
बचपन अवस्था 11 वर्ष से शुरू होकर 12-13 साल तक चलती है।

प्रश्न 8.
किशोर अवस्था कब शुरू तथा खत्म होती है ?
उत्तर-
किशोर अवस्था 14-15 वर्ष से लेकर 20-21 वर्ष तक चलती है।

प्रश्न 9.
किशोर अवस्था के बाद कौन-सी अवस्था आती है ?
उत्तर–
किशोर अवस्था के बाद विवाह की अवस्था आती है।

अति लघु उत्तरात्मक प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण का अर्थ।
उत्तर-
प्रत्येक समाज के कुछ सांस्कृतिक उद्देश्य होते हैं जिन्हें प्राप्त करने के कुछ निश्चित ढंग होते हैं। व्यक्ति को इन ढंगों को सीखना पड़ता है तथा इस सीखने की प्रक्रिया को समाजीकरण कहते हैं।

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण की परिभाषा।
उत्तर-
हर्टन तथा हंट के अनुसार, “समाजीकरण वह प्रक्रिया है जिसके द्वारा व्यक्ति समूहों में रहता है, उनके सामाजिक परिमापों को आत्मसात करता है, जिनकी वजह से उसके विलक्षण स्वैः का उदय होता है।”

प्रश्न 3.
समाजीकरण का एक तत्व।
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण व्यक्ति, समाज तथा समूह के लिए आवश्यक है तथा व्यक्ति समाज के मूल्यों, प्रतिमानों, ज्ञान, व्यवहार करने के तरीकों को सीखता है तथा ग्रहण करता है। यह सीखने की प्रक्रिया तमाम आयु चलती रहती

प्रश्न 4.
समाजीकरण का एक आधार।
उत्तर-
इंसान के बच्चे अन्य मनुष्यों पर अधिक समय के लिए निर्भर करते हैं। वह अपनी प्रत्येक प्रकार की आवश्यकता के लिए अन्य मनुष्यों पर निर्भर करता है। यह निर्भरता समाज में संबंधों के लिए दूसरों पर निर्भर करती है।

लघु उत्तरात्मक प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
समाजीकरण।
उत्तर–
प्रत्येक समाज में कुछ निश्चित किए गए सांस्कृतिक उद्देश्य (Cultural-goals) होते हैं जिनको प्राप्त करने के कुछ निर्धारित ढंग होते हैं। व्यक्ति इन्हें सीखे बिना किसी भी उद्देश्य की प्राप्ति नहीं कर सकता व न ही उसके व्यक्तित्व का निर्माण हो सकता है। यह सब कुछ समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया से ही व्यक्ति सीख सकता है। किंगस्ले डेविस के अनुसार, “यह वह प्रक्रिया है जिसके अनुसार मानवीय बच्चा संस्कृति ग्रहण करता है। व्यक्ति अपनी सम्पूर्ण ज़िन्दगी समाज के सांस्कृतिक (Socio-cultural) तत्त्वों को सीखता है। इसको ही समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया कहा जाता है।”

प्रश्न 2.
समाजीकरण के विभिन्न साधनों के नाम।
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण की प्रमुख साधनों के नाम नीचे लिखे हैं-

परिवार (Family)
खेल समूह (Play Group)
आस-पड़ोस (Neighbourhood)
स्कूल (School)
सामाजिक संस्थाएं (Social Institutions)।

प्रश्न 3.
“स्वैः”।
उत्तर-
व्यक्ति जन्म के एकदम पश्चात् सामाजिक व्यक्ति नहीं बनता। उसमें स्वैः का विकास भी लोगों व पदार्थों के सम्पर्क में आने से ही होता है। स्वैः का अर्थ है जब व्यक्ति कार्यों व विचारों आदि के प्रति चेतन हो जाता है उसको हम व्यक्ति का स्वैः कहते हैं। नय जन्मा बच्चा दूसरे व्यक्तियों से कोई भेद-भाव नहीं करता बल्कि दूसरे व्यक्तियों की अन्तक्रिया के परिणामस्वरूप वह उपरोक्त भेद को समझना शुरू कर देता है। व्यक्ति की इस योग्यता को ही स्वैः का नाम दिया जाता है।

प्रश्न 4.
परिवार-समाजीकरण के साधन के रूप में।
उत्तर-
व्यक्ति के समाजीकरण में परिवार का विशेष स्थान है। बच्चे की आरम्भिक शिक्षा का आधार परिवार ही होता है। परिवार में ही बच्चे के मन के ऊपर कई प्रकार की भावनाओं जैसे प्यार, हमदर्दी इत्यादि का प्रभाव पड़ता है जिससे वह कई प्रकार के गुणों को सीखता है। परिवार में ही बच्चे को समाज की तथा परिवार की परम्पराओं, रीति-रिवाजों, परिमापों, कीमतों इत्यादि के बारे में बताया जाता है। बच्चे को परिवार में ही व्यवहार के तरीकों तथा नियमों की शिक्षा दी जाती है। परिवार में बच्चा बड़ों का आदर करना सीखता है। परिवार में बच्चा कई प्रकार के गुणों को सीखता है जिससे वह समाज का एक अच्छा नागरिक बनता है। परिवार में व्यक्ति अनुशासन में रहना सीखता है तथा उसे सम्बन्धों की पहचान हो जाती है। माता-पिता घर में ऐसा वातावरण तैयार करते हैं जिससे वह अच्छी आदतें सीख सकें। इस तरह परिवार समाजीकरण का सबसे महत्त्वपूर्ण साधन है।

प्रश्न 5.
स्कूल-समाजीकरण के साधन के रूप में।
उत्तर-
परिवार के बाद सबसे महत्त्वपूर्ण साधन है स्कूल। स्कूल एक असभ्य बच्चे को सभ्य रूप देता है या फिर आप कह सकते हैं कि कच्चे माल को तैयार माल का रूप देता है। स्कूल में ही बच्चे के गुणों का विकास होता है। स्कूल में बच्चा अन्य बच्चों के साथ रहता है तथा अध्यापकों का उसके मन पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। अध्यापक के बोलने, उठने, बैठने, व्यवहार करने, पढ़ने के तरीकों का उसके मन पर काफ़ी प्रभाव पड़ता है। बच्चे अध्यापकों को अपना आदर्श मान लेते हैं तथा इससे उनके व्यक्तित्व पर काफी असर पड़ता है। बच्चे के जीवन का महत्त्वपूर्ण भाग स्कूल में व्यतीत होता है जिससे उसके जीवन पर काफी असर पड़ता है।

प्रश्न 6.
समाजीकरण का महत्त्व।
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण का हमारे जीवन में बहुत महत्त्व है क्योंकि समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया से ही व्यक्ति समाज में रहने के योग्य बनता है। जब बच्चा पैदा होता है तो उसे कुछ भी पता नहीं होता। वह अपनी सभी आवश्यकताओं के लिए परिवार के सदस्यों पर निर्भर होता है। परिवार उसकी सभी आवश्यकताएं पूर्ण करता है तथा उसे जीवन जीने के तरीके सिखाता है। उसे समाज में रहने, व्यवहार करने के नियमों के बारे में बताया जाता है तथा यह सिखाने की प्रक्रिया ही समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया है। इस प्रकार एक बच्चे को अच्छा नागरिक बनाने में समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया का बहुत महत्त्व होता है।

बड़े उतर वाले प्रश्न

प्रश्न-
समाजीकरण का क्या अर्थ है ? विस्तार सहित लिखो।
अथवा
समाजीकरण क्या होता है ? इसकी परिभाषा का वर्णन करो।
उत्तर-
समाजीकरण का अर्थ (Meaning of Socialization)-बच्चा इस संसार में एक छोटे से शरीर के रूप में आता है, जिसको अपने शरीर के लिये भौतिक आवश्यकताएं पूर्ण करनी पड़ती हैं और वह करता भी है। परन्तु धीरे-धीरे कुछ समय पश्चात् वह बड़ा होकर मानव बन जाता है जिसके पास अपने विचार, भावनाएं, इच्छाएं, स्वभाव व पसन्दें हैं। यह सब कुछ व्यक्ति को जन्म से प्राप्त न होकर बल्कि समाज में रहते हुए धीरे-धीरे प्राप्त होता है। यह सब वह समाज में रहकर ही सीखता हैं। इसी सीखने की प्रक्रिया को ही समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया कहा जाता है। इस प्रकार हम कह सकते हैं “समाजीकरण वह प्रक्रिया है, जिसके साथ एक बच्चा जो कि पशु के समान होता है कुछ मानवीय वृत्ति के गुण सीख कर सम्पूर्ण मानव बन जाता है। इस प्रकार समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया सामाजिक नियमों, परिमापों, गुणों को सीखने की प्रक्रिया है।” समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया पशु स्वरूप बच्चे को इन्सान बनाती है। इसके साथ-साथ यह केवल व्यक्ति को समाज की आवश्यकताओं के अनुरूप व्यवहार करना नहीं सिखाती है बल्कि व्यक्ति को अन्य कई प्रकार की वस्तुएं जैसे भाषा, योग्यता, तकनीक, परिमापों आदि के अनुसार व्यवहार करना भी सिखाती है।

इस प्रक्रिया के द्वारा व्यक्ति को यह पता चलता है कि उसने समाज के बीच रहते हुए क्या सीखना है और उसे क्या सीखना चाहिए। प्रत्येक समाज एवं उसकी संस्कृति का तभी विकास सम्भव है यदि समाज में जन्म लेने वाले प्रत्येक बच्चे को समाज एवं संस्कृति की जानकारी दी जाए। संस्कृति के प्रत्येक पक्ष की उसे जानकारी दी जाए और सब कुछ समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के अनुसार ही मुमकिन है। इस प्रक्रिया के द्वारा ही व्यक्ति समाज में रहना और क्रिया करना सीखता है और यह सीखता है कि उसको किन नियमों के अनुसार व्यवहार करना चाहिये।

समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के साथ व्यक्ति न केवल समाज की आवश्यकता को पूरी करता है, बल्कि व्यक्तित्व को भी संवारता है और कई पक्षों को प्राप्त करता है। इस प्रक्रिया के साथ ही वह बोलना सीखता है। समाज के नियमों के अनुसार व्यवहार करना और योग्यता आदि कई प्रकार की वस्तुओं से सीखता है। इस प्रकार समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया वह प्रक्रिया है, जिसके साथ व्यक्ति को यह पता चलता है कि उसने समाज में कैसे रहना है? क्या करना है ? और किस तरह व्यवहार करना है? प्रत्येक नये जन्मे बच्चे के लिये यह आवश्यक है कि वह धीरे-धीरे समाज में रहने के तौर तरीके-सीख ले और यह केवल वह समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के द्वारा ही सीख सकता है। इस तरह समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के द्वारा व्यक्ति, समाज का एक क्रियाशील सदस्य बन जाता है और समाज के नियमों, लोक-गीतों एवं व्यवहारों के अनुसार कार्य करता है।

समाजीकरण की परिभाषाएं (Definitions of Socialization) –

किंगस्ले डेविस (Kingsley Devis) के अनुसार, “समाजीकरण वह प्रक्रिया है, जिसके द्वारा एक मानवीय बच्चा संस्कृति ग्रहण करता है और समाज की संरचना में प्रवेश करता है।”
फिचर (Fichter) के अनुसार, “समाजीकरण एक व्यक्ति एवं उसके साथी व्यक्तियों के बीच एक दूसरे को प्रभावित करने की ऐसी प्रक्रिया है जिसके फलस्वरूप सामाजिक व्यवहार के ढंग स्वीकार किये जाते हैं और उनके साथ अनुकूल किया जाता है।”
हर्टन और हन्ट (Harton & Hunt) के अनुसार, “समाजीकरण वह प्रक्रिया है जिसके द्वारा व्यक्ति जिन समूहों में रहता है, उनके सामाजिक परिमापों को आदत मान करता है जिस कारण उनके विलक्षण स्वामित्व का उदाहरण होता है।”
हैरी० एम० जॉनसन (Harry M. Johnson) के अनुसार, “समाजीकरण सीखने की उस प्रक्रिया को कहते हैं जो सीखने वाले को सामाजिक भूमिकाओं को निभाने के योग्य बनाता है।”

इस तरह इन परिभाषाओं के आधार पर हम कह सकते हैं कि समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया सीखने की वह प्रक्रिया है, जिसमें बच्चा समाज में रहने के सारे नियम, परिमाप, व्यवहार करने के तरीके सीखता है। उस प्रक्रिया के द्वारा संस्कृति एक पीढ़ी से दूसरी पीढ़ी को हस्तान्तरित की जाती है। व्यक्ति जीवन के संगठित एवं प्रवाहित तरीकों के साथ अनुकूलन करना सीखता है। व्यक्ति को जीवन जीने के लिये जो तरीके की आवश्यकता, गुणों की आवश्यकता, इच्छाएं, कीमतें, रहने-सहने के ढंग की आवश्यकता होती है, वह समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के द्वारा ही सीखी जाती है। ये प्रक्रिया न केवल जन्मे हुए नवजात बच्चे को प्रभावित करती है बल्कि ये सारी उम्र व्यक्ति को प्रभावित करती है। यह प्रक्रिया व्यक्ति के अन्दर ही चलती रहती है। इस कारण ही बच्चा बचपन से ही समाज के नियमों के साथ अनुकूलन करना सीखता है और समाज के साथ घुल-मिल जाता है।
इस तरह संक्षेप में समाज की संस्कृति समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के साथ पीढ़ी दर पीढ़ी हस्तान्तरित होती रहती है।

समाजीकरण PSEB 11th Class Sociology Notes

जब एक बच्चा पैदा होता है उसे कुछ भी नहीं पता होता। धीरे-धीरे वह बड़ा होता है तथा वह समाज में रहने के तौर-तरीके सीखता है। समाज में रहने के तौर-तरीके सीखने की प्रक्रिया को ही समाजीकरण कहा जाता है।
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया बच्चे के जन्म के बाद से ही शुरू हो जाती है तथा तमाम आयु चलती रहती है। व्यक्ति खत्म हो जाता है परन्तु यह प्रक्रिया कभी भी खत्म नहीं होती। अगर समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया नहीं होगी तो मनुष्य जानवरों की तरह व्यवहार करेंगे तथा समाज नाम की कोई चीज़ नहीं होगी।
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया तमाम आयु चलने वाली प्रक्रिया है। जैसे-जैसे बच्चा बड़ा होता जाता है, स्वतन्त्र होता जाता है तथा समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया आवश्यक हो जाती है। इस आयु में आकर उसे नियन्त्रण में रखना पड़ता है ताकि वह गलत रास्ते पर न जाए। यहाँ पर आकर समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया का वास्तविक लाभ नज़र आता है।
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया के पाँच स्तर होते हैं-बाल्यावस्था (Infant stage), बचपन अवस्था (Childhood stage), किशोरावस्था (Adolescent stage), युवावस्था (Adulthood stage) तथा वृद्धावस्था (Old age)।
बाल्यावस्था पैदा होने से शुरू होकर दो वर्ष तक चलती है। बचपन अवस्था 13-14 वर्ष की आयु तक चलती रहती है। किशोरावस्था 17-18 वर्ष तक चलती रहती है। युवावस्था 45-50 वर्ष तक चलती है तथा उसके बाद वृद्धावस्था शुरू होती है।
समाजीकरण की प्रक्रिया को पूर्ण करने के कई साधन होते हैं। इस साधनों को हम दो भागों में विभाजित करते हैं-औपचारिक तथा अनौपचारिक। समाजीकरण के अनौपचारिक साधनों में हम परिवार, खेल समूह, धर्म इत्यादि को ले सकते हैं तथा औपचारिक साधनों में कानूनी व्यवस्था, राजनीतिक व्यवस्था इत्यादि आते हैं।
समाजीकरण (Socialisation)—वह लगातार चलने वाली प्रक्रिया. जिसमें व्यक्ति अपनी व्यक्तिगत पहचान प्राप्त करता है तथा समाज में रहने के तौर-तरीके, कीमतें इत्यादि सीखता है।
स्वै (Self)-व्यक्ति की विशेष पहचान।
क्रीड़ा समूह (Play group)-व्यक्तियों का समूह, जिसमें सभी लोग साधारणतया समान आयु के होते हैं जिनके साथ व्यक्ति बैठना पसंद करता है तथा जो व्यक्ति के व्यवहार व विचार को प्रभावित कर सकते हैं।
समाजीकरण के औपचारिक साधन (Formal means of socialisation) समाजीकरण के वह साधन जिन्हें संस्थागत साधन भी कहा जाता है तथा जिनके पीछे विशेष शक्ति होती है। जैसे कि स्कूल, कानून, राजनीतिक व्यवस्था इत्यादि।
समाजीकरण के अनौपचारिक साधन (Informal means of socialisation)—इन्हें सामाजिक समूह साधन भी कहा जाता है जिसमें अन्य व्यक्ति तथा सामाजिक संस्थाएं व्यक्ति का समाजीकरण अनौपचारिक ढंग से करती हैं।

PSEB 7th Class Home Science Solutions Chapter 2 शारीरिक परिवर्तन

September 20, 2024September 19, 2024 by Prasanna

Punjab State Board PSEB 7th Class Home Science Book Solutions Chapter 2 शारीरिक परिवर्तन Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 7 Home Science Chapter 2 शारीरिक परिवर्तन

PSEB 7th Class Home Science Guide शारीरिक परिवर्तन Textbook Questions and Answers

वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
शारीरिक और मानसिक परिवर्तन कब होते हैं?
उत्तर-
शारीरिक और मानसिक परिवर्तन 11 से 15 वर्षों के बीच में होते हैं।

प्रश्न 2.
यौवनारम्भ किसे कहते हैं?
उत्तर-
शारीरिक और मानसिक परिवर्तन 11 से 15 वर्षों के बीच में होते हैं। वे अधिक महत्त्वपूर्ण और गहन होते हैं। इस अवस्था को यौवनारम्भ कहते हैं।

प्रश्न 3.
लड़के और लड़कियां किस उम्र में जवान होते हैं?
उत्तर-
12 से 15 वर्ष की उम्र में लड़कियां और लड़के जवान हो जाते हैं।

लघूत्तर प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
परिपक्व अवस्था या जवानी के समय लड़के लड़कियों का व्यवहार क्यों बदल जाता है?
उत्तर-
परिपक्व अवस्था में लड़कियों में सबसे बड़ा परिवर्तन मासिक धर्म का शुरू होना है। इसके साथ ही शरीर में और भी परिवर्तन होते हैं। उनका कद जल्दी बढ़ता है और शरीर की गोलाइयां भर जाती हैं। छातियां उभरने लगती हैं और धीरे-धीरे पूरी तरह परिपक्व हो जाती है। वस्ति-प्रदेश चौड़ा हो जाता है। शरीर की बनावट के कारण अब और भी भरी और जवान स्त्री जैसी हो जाती है। धीरे-धीरे आवाज़ भी बदल जाती है।

लड़कों में जवानी का यह भाग लम्बा और धीरे-धीरे चलता है। उनके लिंग विकास शुरू होने के उपरान्त उनका शरीर लम्बा और कुछ बेढंगा हो जाता है। ठोढ़ी पर बाल आने शुरू हो जाते हैं। आवाज़ फटनी शुरू हो जाती है। धीरे-धीरे यह आवाज़ भर जाती है और मर्दो की तरह हो जाती है। उनके कंधे और छातियां चौड़ी हो जाती हैं।

इन परिवर्तनों में शरीर की क्रियाओं पर कई प्रकार का असर पड़ता है। अब उनको बच्चा नहीं समझा जाता। ज़िम्मेदारी का काम उनको काफ़ी दिया जाता है। इससे थकावट और सुस्ती भी आ जाती है। सोने और हाज़मे में भी फर्क आ जाता है। सबसे अधिक प्रभाव उनके व्यवहार पर पड़ता है। लिंग चेतना जागृत होने से उनका मन अस्थिर हो जाता है। काम करने को जी नहीं करता। अकेले रहने को मन करता है। वे जल्दी ऊब जाते हैं और उनमें यह भावना आ जाती है कि उनको कोई प्यार नहीं करता। जिन बातों में पहले दिल लगता था वे अब मन को अच्छी नहीं लगतीं। बड़ों के प्रति विरोध की भावना भी जागती है। कहना मानने को दिल नहीं करता। कुछ समय के लिए लड़के और लड़कियों में आपसी विरोध जागृत होता है मगर बाद में आकर्षण में बदल जाता है। इस उम्र में व्यक्ति सपनों की दुनिया में ही रमा रहता है।

प्रश्न 2.
इस समय माता-पिता और अध्यापकों का क्या कर्त्तव्य बनता है?
उत्तर-
यह समय बहुत ही नाजुक होता है। माता-पिता और स्कूल के अध्यापकों का विशेष कर्त्तव्य बनता है कि वे इस उम्र के बच्चों की तरफ अधिक ध्यान दें और प्यार करें साथ ही उनमें पूरी दिलचस्पी भी लें। अगर बच्चों के साथ ठीक व्यवहार किया जाए तो यह समय आदर्शवाद और ठीक मूल्यों से व्यतीत हो सकता है।

निबन्धात्मक प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
8 से 11 वर्ष की आयु के लड़कों में कौन-कौन से शारीरिक परिवर्तन होते हैं?
उत्तर-
इन वर्षों में बच्चा अनुभव करता है कि उसको बहुत ज्ञान हो गया है। इस भावना से बच्चे में एक विशेष प्रकार का अभिमान आ जाता है। बच्चे की इच्छा अपने साथियों के संग रहने और उनके बीच अपने आपको महत्त्वपूर्ण सिद्ध करने की रहती है। इन वर्षों में बच्चों का विकास बहुत तेजी से नहीं होता। उसका भार और लम्बाई लगभग समान रूप से बढ़ते हैं। उसका माथा चौड़ा हो जाता है, होंठ भर जाते हैं, नाक बड़ा हो जाता है, ऊपर और नीचे के जबड़े के आपसी मेल में भी परिवर्तन आता है। इसके साथ उसकी शक्ल में बचपना नहीं रहता और अब वह छोटा आदमी या छोटी महिला की तरह लगने लगता है। हाथ, पाँव, टाँगें और बाजुएँ भी बढ़ती हैं। बालों की चमक कम होने लगती है और वे पहले से रूखे हो जाते हैं। इस उम्र में बच्चा भावुक होता है और उसे अकेलेपन का अनुभव होने लगता है। स्कूल में किसी प्रकार की असफलता का असर बहुत अधिक होता है।

प्रश्न 2.
8-11 वर्ष की उम्र में लड़कियों में कौन-कौन से शारीरिक परिवर्तन आते हैं?
उत्तर-
देखें उपरोक्त प्रश्न।

प्रश्न 3.
11 से 15 वर्ष की उम्र में कौन-कौन से शारीरिक पारवर्तन आते हैं?
उत्तर-
जो शारीरिक और मानसिक परिवर्तन 11 से 15 वर्षों के बीच में होते हैं वे अधिक महत्त्वपूर्ण और गहन होते हैं। इस अवस्था को ‘यौवनारम्भ’ कहते हैं। इस समय में शरीर में अधिकतर परिवर्तन उसके अन्दर ग्रंथियों की क्रिया द्वारा संचालित होती है। इन ग्रन्थियों के रसों के कारण लिंग अंगों में विकास होता है। प्रकृति की ओर से इस समय बच्चे के शरीर में ऐसे परिवर्तन आते हैं जिनसे वह बच्चा नहीं रहता और धीरे-धीरे उसमें सन्तान पैदा करने की शक्ति आ जाती है। ये परिवर्तन दो प्रकार के होते हैं-आन्तरिक या मुख्य और बाहरी या गौण परिवर्तन। आन्तरिक परिवर्तन लिंग से हैं, लेकिन शरीर के बाहरी हिस्सों में जो परिवर्तन आते हैं उनके द्वारा ही लड़कियों और लड़कों में अन्तर आ जाता है और उनकी चेतना में भी अन्तर आ जाता है।

Home Science Guide for Class 7 PSEB शारीरिक परिवर्तन Important Questions and Answers

अति छोटे उत्तर वाले प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
5-6 वर्ष की उम्र में शरीर में कैसा परिवर्तन होता है?
उत्तर-
5-6 वर्ष की उम्र में शरीर में बड़ी तेजी के साथ परिवर्तन होता है।

प्रश्न 2.
किस उम्र में व्यक्ति सपनों की दुनिया में ही रमा रहता है?
उत्तर-
परिपक्व अवस्था या जवानी में व्यक्ति सपनों की दुनिया में ही रमा रहता है।

छोटे उत्तर वाले प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
5 से 6 वर्ष की उम्र में बच्चों में कौन-कौन से परिवर्तन आते हैं?
उत्तर-
5 से 6 वर्ष की उम्र में बच्चों में बड़ी तेजी के साथ परिवर्तन होता है। बच्चे इस उम्र में काफ़ी भावुक हो जाते हैं। यह आवश्यक नहीं है कि वे अपनी भावनाएं उसी समय प्रकट करें, लेकिन उनके हाव-भाव से उनकी भावनाओं का पता चल जाता है, जैसे कि डर की भावना के कारण बच्चे रात को सोते हुए बिस्तर पर पेशाब कर देते हैं और कुछ बच्चे अंगूठा चूसते, हकलाते या बेचैन रहते हैं।
उनको लिंग का पता लग जाता है और लड़कियां लड़कों से और लड़के लड़कियों से अपने को अलग समझने लगते हैं।

प्रश्न 2.
11-12 वर्ष की उम्र की लड़कियों की माताओं और अध्यापिकाओं को क्या समझाना चाहिए?
उत्तर-
11-12 वर्ष की उम्र की लड़कियों की माताओं और अध्यापिकाओं को चाहिए कि वे लड़कियों को अपने विश्वास में लेकर उनको शरीर के अन्दर होने वाले परिवर्तन से पहले ही जानकारी दे दें ताकि ये परिवर्तन होने लगे तो लड़कियां घबराएं नहीं, बल्कि अपने आप को सम्भाल सकें। खासतौर पर मासिक धर्म से पहले माताओं को चाहिए कि लड़कियों को इस प्राकृतिक परिवर्तन के बारे में जानकारी दे दें ताकि लड़कियां इस हालात में किसी ग़लत धारणा से अपने आपको हीन अनुभव न समझने लगें या ऐसे ही कोई ग़लत सुझावों में न आ जाएं।

एक शब्द में उत्तर दें

प्रश्न 1.
बच्चों में पहली बार शारीरिक, मानसिक तथा भावनात्मक परिवर्तन कब होते हैं ?
उत्तर-
5-6 वर्ष की आयु में।

प्रश्न 2.
जवानी में व्यक्ति कौन-सी दुनिया में रमा रहता है?
उत्तर-
सपनों की दुनिया में।

प्रश्न 3.
11 से 15 वर्ष के बीच शारीरिक तथा मानसिक परिवर्तन होते हैं। इस दौर को क्या कहते हैं?
उत्तर-
यौवनारम्भ।

प्रश्न 4.
लड़कों में ……………… समय लम्बा तथा धीरे-धीरे चलता है।
उत्तर-
यौवनकाल।

प्रश्न 5.
यौवन का समय कैसा होता है?
उत्तर-
अत्यधिक नाजुक।

शारीरिक परिवर्तन PSEB 7th Class Home Science Notes

बच्चों में 5-6 साल और फिर 9 से 16 साल की उम्र में शारीरिक, मानसिक और भावात्मक परिवर्तन होते हैं।
जो शारीरिक और मानसिक परिवर्तन 11 से 15 वर्षों के बीच में होते हैं वे अधिक महत्त्वपूर्ण और गहन होते हैं। इस अवस्था को यौवनारम्भ कहते हैं।
लड़कियों में सबसे बड़ा परिवर्तन मासिक धर्म का शुरू होना है।
इसके साथ साथ और भी परिवर्तन होते हैं। शारीरिक परिवर्तन होने से अपने आप पर विश्वास नहीं रहता, उसे यह डर लगा रहता है कि वह सुन्दर नहीं है।
छोटे परिवारों में माता-पिता बच्चों में किशोरावस्था में होने वाले शारीरिक और मानसिक समस्याओं पर उचित ध्यान दे सकते हैं,
परन्तु बड़े परिवारों में वे बच्चों के प्रति अधिक ध्यान नहीं दे सकते। जिससे बच्चों के मन में कई प्रकार की कुण्ठाएं उत्पन्न हो सकती हैं।

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 3 राजनीतिक संस्कृति

September 20, 2024September 19, 2024 by Prasanna

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 3 राजनीतिक संस्कृति Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Political Science Chapter 3 राजनीतिक संस्कृति

दीर्घ उत्तरीय प्रश्न-

प्रश्न 1.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की परिभाषा कीजिए। राजनीतिक संस्कृति की विशेषताओं और तत्त्वों का वर्णन करें।
(Define Political Culture. Discuss the characteristics and components of Political Culture.)
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति आधुनिक राजनीति विज्ञान का एक नवीन महत्त्वपूर्ण दृष्टिकोण है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति का दृष्टिकोण मनोविज्ञान और समाज शास्त्र को एकीकृत करने का प्रयास है ताकि आधुनिक मनोविज्ञान की क्रान्तिकारी खोजों तथा समाजशास्त्रों में आधुनिक प्रगति दोनों को गतिशील राजनीतिक विश्लेषण के लिए प्रयुक्त किया जा सके जिससे जन-समाजों के दृष्टिकोण को अपनाने में समग्रता हो। वास्तव में, राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक आधुनिक शब्दावली है जो इन अवधारणाओं और राष्ट्रीय राजनीति मनोविज्ञान तथा लोगों के आधारभूत मूल्यों से सम्बन्धित ज्ञान को अधिक व्यवस्थित रूप में रखने का प्रयास करती है। किसी समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति को परिभाषित करने में लोगों के सभी राजनीतिक भावों को लिया जाना आवश्यक नहीं है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति में केवल समीक्षात्मक किन्तु व्यापक रूप से प्रचलित विश्वासों और भावों को ही लिया जाता है जो अनुस्थापन के उन विशिष्ट रूपों का निर्माण कर सकें जो कि राजनीतिक प्रक्रिया को व्यवस्था और स्वरूप प्रदान करते हैं।

वास्तव में राजनीतिक संस्कृति समकालीन राजनीतिक विश्लेषण में एक महत्त्वपूर्ण विकास की द्योतक है क्योंकि यह उन प्रयत्नों को प्रस्तुत करती है जिनके द्वारा हम व्यक्तिगत मनोविज्ञान के लोगों को खोए बिना सम्पूर्ण राजनीतिक संस्कृति की अवधारणा सामाजिक और आर्थिक कारकों तथा राजनीतिक कार्यकलापों के बीच की कड़ियों की जांच करने का एक उपयुक्त आधार प्रस्तुत करती है। आलमण्ड और पावेल (Almond and Powell) ने राजनीतिक पद्धतियों की विविधतापूर्ण तुलना के लिए समाजशास्त्र और मानवशास्त्र के क्षेत्रों से ली गई धारणाओं को अनुकूल बनाया है। अतीत में राजनीतिक पद्धतियों की तुलना के लिए किए गए प्रयत्न कानूनी संस्थागत पहलुओं तक ही सीमित थे जिसको उसने तुलना के लिए लाभदायक नहीं माना। इसलिए आलमण्ड (Almond) राजनीतिक पद्धतियों का वर्गीकरण उनकी संरचनाओं और संस्कृति के आधार पर करता है।

राजनीतिक संस्कृति (Political Culture) शब्द का सबसे पहले प्रयोग गेबरील आलमण्ड (Gabriel Almond) ने 1956 में अपने एक लेख-Comparative Political System में किया था। यह लेख ‘जनरल ऑफ पोलिटिकल साईंस’ में छपा था। इस लेख में आलमण्ड ने लिखा-प्रत्येक राजनीतिक व्यवस्था में राजनीतिक क्रियाओं की एक विशिष्ट शैली अन्तर्निहित है। मैंने इसे ‘राजनीतिक संस्कृति’ नाम देना ही उपयुक्त समझा। आलमण्ड के पश्चात् पाई (Pye), सैम्युल बीयर (Samuel Beer), सिडनी वर्बा (Sidney Verba), डैनिश कावनाग (Dennis Kavanagh) इत्यादि अन्य अमेरिकन विद्वानों ने भी इस धारणा की विस्तृत व्याख्या की है।

राजनीतिक संस्कृति का अर्थ (Meaning of Political Culture)-राजनीतिक संस्कृति का अर्थ जानने से पहले संस्कृति’ शब्द का अर्थ जानना अति आवश्यक है। किसी देश के साहित्य और संगीत की, परम्पराओं और आस्थाओं की, कला और कौशल की मिली-जुली निरन्तर बहने वाली धारा को उस देश की संस्कृति कहते हैं। टेलर (Tayler) के अनुसार, “संस्कृति में, समाज के एक सदस्य होने के नाते, मनुष्य द्वारा अर्जित ज्ञान, विश्वास, कला, आचार, कानून, प्रथाएं तथा दूसरी क्षमताएं शामिल होती हैं।” ग्राहम वालास (Graham Wallas) के मतानुसार, ‘संस्कृति विचारों, मूल्यों और उद्देश्यों का समूह है। यह सामाजिक उत्तराधिकार है जो प्रशिक्षण द्वारा हमें पिछली पीढ़ियों से प्राप्त हुआ है। यह जीव सम्बन्धी उत्तराधिकार से पृथक् है जो कीटाणुओं द्वारा स्वयं हमारे पास आया है।”

जिस प्रकार प्रत्येक देश की एक संस्कृति होती है, उसी प्रकार प्रत्येक देश की एक राजनीतिक संस्कृति भी होती है। किसी देश के राजनीतिक चरित्र और आदतों की, राजनीतिक सूझ-बूझ और व्यवहार की, राजनीतिक संस्थाओं और उनकी कार्य पद्धति की मिली-जुली धारा को उस समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति कहते हैं। राजनीतिक संस्कृति की अवधारणा के जन्मदाता गैब्रील आलमण्ड ने राजनीतिक संस्कृति की व्याख्या इस प्रकार की है-“राजनीतिक संस्कृति का विचार इस ओर संकेत करता है कि किसी भी समाज की परम्पराएं, सार्वजनिक संस्थाओं की भावनाएं, नागरिकों के सामूहिक तर्क शक्ति और भावावेश तथा उसके नेताओं की कार्य शैली केवल ऐतिहासिक अनुभव की बेतरतीव उपज मात्र नहीं है बल्कि वे सब आपस में एक बड़ी सार्थक इकाई के रूप में सुगठित की जा सकती हैं और उनके द्वारा सम्बन्धों का ताना बना बुना जा सकता है जो सार्थक रूप से समझा जा सके। राजनीतिक संस्कृति व्यक्ति को उसके राजनीतिक आचरण का नियन्त्रणकारी आदेश देती है तथा उसकी सामूहिकता को इस प्रकार के मूल्यों एवं तर्कों की एक ऐसी व्यवस्थित संरचना प्रदान करती है जो संस्थाओं और संगठनों के कार्य निष्पादन में तालमेल स्थापित करती है।”

राजनीतिक संस्कृति की परिभाषाएं (Definitions of Political Culture)-राजनीतिक संस्कृति की अवधारणा की परिभाषा कई लेखकों के द्वारा दी गई
1. एलन आर० बाल (Allan R. Bal) के शब्दों में, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति उन अभिवृत्तियों और विश्वासों और भावनाओं और समाज के मूल्यों से मिलकर बनती है जिनका सम्बन्ध राजनीतिक पद्धति और राजनीतिक प्रश्नों से होता है।” (“A Political Culture is composed of attitudes, beliefs, emotions and values of society and that relates to political system and to political issues.”)

2. आलमण्ड और पावेल (Almond and Powell) ने अपनी पुस्तक “Comparative Politics : A Development Approach” में राजनीतिक संस्कृति की परिभाषा करते हुए लिखा है, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति किसी भी राजनीतिक प्रणाली के सदस्यों में राजनीति के प्रति पाए जाने वाले अभिमुखन और अभिवृत्तियों का स्वरूप है।” (“Political Culture is a pattern of individual attitudes and orientations towards politics among members of a political system.”)

3. राय मैक्रीडिस (Roy Mcridis) का विचार है कि, “सामान्य लक्ष्य तथा सामान्य स्वीकृत नियम ही राजनीतिक संस्कृति का अर्थ है।” (“Political Culture means commonly shared goals and commonly accepted rules.”)

4. फाइनर (Finer) का कथन है, “राष्ट्र की राजनीतिक संस्कृति मुख्यतः शासकों, राजनीतिक संस्थाओं तथा प्रक्रियाओं की वैधता से सम्बन्धित है।” (“Nation’s Political Culture seems to concentrate largely on the legitimacy of rules and political institution and procedures.”).

5. ऐरिक रो (Eric Rowe) के शब्दों में, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति व्यक्तिगत मूल्यों, विश्वासों तथा भावनात्मक व्यवहारों की आकृति है।” (“A Political Culture is a pattern of individual values, beliefs and emotional attitudes.”)

6. टालकॉब पारसन (Talcob Parsons) के अनुसार, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति का सम्बन्ध राजनीतिक उद्देश्यों के प्रति अनुकूलन है।” (“Political Culture is connected with orientations towards political object.”)

लूसियन पाई ने भी राजनीतिक संस्कृति की व्याख्या और परिभाषा अपनी पुस्तक, “Political Culture and Political Development” में प्रस्तुत की है। उसने लिखा है कि यह हाल ही में उत्पन्न हुआ शब्द है जो इन पुरानी धारणाओं, राजनीतिक विचारधाराओं, राष्ट्रीय नैतिकता और भावना, राष्ट्रीय राजनीति मनोविज्ञान और किसी जन-समूह के आधारभूत मूल्य से सम्बन्धित समझदारी को अधिक स्पष्ट और क्रमबद्ध बनाने का प्रयत्न करता है। इसका अर्थ यह है कि राजनीतिक संस्कृति व्यक्ति के लिए प्रभावशाली राजनीतिक व्यवहार की ओर मार्ग-निर्देशन करती है और समाज के लिए उन मूल्यों तथा विवेकपूर्ण विचारों की व्यवस्था करती है जोकि संस्थाओं और संगठनों के कार्यकलापों में तालमेल पैदा करता है।

इन सभी परिभाषाओं के आधार पर यह कहा जा सकता है कि राजनीतिक संस्कृति लोगों, राजनीतिक विश्वासों, वृत्तियों मनोवृत्तियों, परम्पराओं आदि का समूह है जो उनकी राजनीतिक गतिविधियों को प्रभावित करती है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति से किसी देश की राजनीतिक व्यवस्था के बारे में बहुत कुछ पता चल जाता है।

राजनीतिक संस्कृति की विशेषताएं
(CHARACTERISTICS OF POLITICAL CULTURE)
अथवा
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की प्रकृति (NATURE OF POLITICAL CULTURE)
अथवा
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के महत्त्वपूर्ण पहलू (SOME IMPORTANT ASPECTS OF POLITICAL CULTURE)

1. राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है (The Political Culture is comprehensive Concept)राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है जो लोगों की राजनीतिक प्रणाली के प्रति अभिवृत्तियों, विश्वासों, मूल्यों, मनोभावनाओं आदि से बनती है। जिस प्रकार किसी देश के साहित्य और संगीत की परम्पराओं और आस्थाओं की, कला और कौशल की मिली-जुली निरन्तर बहने वाली धारा उस देश की संस्कृति है, उसी तरह, किसी देश के राजनीतिक चरित्र और आदतों की, राजनीतिक सूझबूझ और व्यवहार की, राजनीतिक संस्थाओं और उनकी कार्य पद्धति की मिलीजुली धारा को उस समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति कहते हैं।

2. राजनीतिक संस्कृति सामान्य संस्कृति का भाग है (Political Culture is a part of General Culture)प्रत्येक राजनीतिक व्यवस्था की राजनीतिक संस्कृति मूल रूप से उस समाज की संस्कृति से ही प्रभावित होती है। प्रत्येक व्यवस्था की राजनीतिक संस्कृति अपने मुख्य तत्त्व, अपने आदर्श, अपने मूल्य उस व्यवस्था की सामान्य संस्कृति से ही ग्रहण करती है। डेनिश कावनाग के अनुसार राजनीतिक संस्कृति समाज की विशाल संस्कृति का ही एक भाग है। डॉ० हरिश्चन्द्र शर्मा के शब्दों में, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति अधिक सामान्य संस्कृति का एक अभिन्न पहलू है। एक संस्कृति के आधारभूत विश्वास, मूल्य और आदर्श सामान्यतया राजनीतिक संस्कृति के निर्माण में मुख्य भूमिका निभाते हैं। एक व्यक्ति के राजनीतिक विश्वास उसके अन्य विश्वासों का ही एक अंग है। सामान्य संस्कृति के मूल्यों और विश्वासों से राजनीतिक संस्कृति अप्रभावित नहीं रह सकती।”

3. विभिन्न राजनीतिक प्रणालियों की विभिन्न राजनीतिक संस्कृति (Different Political System have different Political Cultures)–राजनीतिक संस्कृति के विद्वानों का यह मत है कि विभिन्न राजनीतिक प्रणालियों की राजनीतिक संस्कृति भी विभिन्न होती है। एंग्लो-अमेरिका राजनीतिक प्रणालियों (इंग्लैण्ड और अमेरिका) की राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक जैसी है। महाद्वीपीय यूरोपीय राजनीतिक प्रणालियों (फ्रांस, इटली, नार्वे आदि) की राजनीतिक संस्कृति दूसरी प्रकार की है और औद्योगीकरण से पूर्व की या आंशिक रूप से औद्योगीकृत राजनीतिक प्रणालियां (पाकिस्तान, सीरिया, म्यांमार आदि) की तीसरी प्रकार की हैं जबकि सर्वाधिकारवादी राजनीतिक प्रणालियां (उत्तरी कोरिया, चीन आदि) की चौथी प्रकार की हैं। राजनीतिक संस्कृतियों के अलग-अलग होने के कारण ही एक ही प्रकार की राजनीतिक प्रणाली विभिन्न राज्यों में विभिन्न प्रकार से कार्य करती है। संसदीय शासन प्रणाली इंग्लैण्ड में बहुत सफल है जबकि तीसरी दुनिया (Third World) के देशों में सफल नहीं रही। भारत में लोकतन्त्र प्रणाली सफल है जबकि पाकिस्तान में बिल्कुल असफल रही है।

4. राजनीतिक संस्कृति का आधार (Basis of Political Culture)–लुसियन पाई का मत है कि राजनीतिक संस्कृति दो बातों पर आधारित होती है-

राजनीतिक व्यवस्था के सामूहिक इतिहास की उपज।
उन व्यक्तियों के जीवन इतिहासों की उपज जोकि उस व्यवस्था को जन्म देते हैं। इस प्रकार राजनीतिक संस्कृति की जड़ें सामाजिक जीवन की घटनाओं और व्यक्तिगत अनुभवों में समान रूप से निहित होती हैं।

5. राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक अमूर्त नैतिक धारणा (Political Culture is an abstract moral Concept)राजनीतिक संस्कृति निराकार अथवा अमूर्त है। इसका कोई रूप नहीं है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति को केवल अनुभव किया व समझा जा सकता है पर देखा नहीं जा सकता। राजनीतिक संस्कृति का मूल आधार व्यक्ति और समाज के राजनीतिक मूल्य, विश्वास व मनोवृत्तियां होती हैं। ये मूल्य और विश्वास सामान्य नैतिक धारणाओं के अंग होते हैं। अतः राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक अमूर्त नैतिक धारणा है।

6. राजनीतिक संस्कृति में गतिशीलता (Dynamics in Political Culture)-राजनीतिक संस्कृति स्थिर न होकर गतिशील होती है। यदि राजनीतिक संस्कृति ऐतिहासिक विरासत तथा भौगोलिक परिस्थितियों से प्रभावित होती है तो दूसरी ओर सामाजिक व आर्थिक तत्त्वों से भी प्रभावित होती है। सामाजिक व आर्थिक तत्त्व बदलते रहते हैं, जिस कारण राजनीतिक संस्कृति में भी परिवर्तन होते रहते हैं। राजनीतिक संस्कृति में परिवर्तन धीरे-धीरे और तीव्र भी हो सकते हैं।

7. राजनीतिक विकास और राजनीतिक संस्कृति की परस्पर घनिष्ठता (Close Relation between Political Development and Political Culture) राजनीतिक संस्कृति और राजनीतिक विकास में घनिष्ठ सम्बन्ध पाया जाता है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति राजनीतिक विकास की प्रक्रिया को अत्यधिक प्रभावित करती है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति के अध्ययन के उन तत्त्वों और शक्तियों को समझने में सहायता मिलती है जो विकास और आधुनिकीकरण को प्रेरित एवं बाधित करते हैं।

8. राजनीतिक संस्कृतियों की संरचना और रूप-रेखा (Structure and Configurations of Political Culture) लूसियन पाई का विचार है कि किसी भी समाज में एक-सी राजनीतिक संस्कृति नहीं पाई जाती। इनकी संरचना और रूप-रेखा भिन्न होती है-

सभी राजतन्त्रों में शासकों अथवा सत्ताधारियों की संस्कृति और आम जनता की संस्कृति में एक मूल अन्तर पाया जाता है। जिन लोगों के हाथ में शक्ति होती है, राजनीति पर उनके दृष्टिकोण उन लोगों के दृष्टिकोण से भिन्न होते हैं जिनके हाथों में सत्ता नहीं होती।
राजनीतिक विकास की प्रक्रिया के आधार पर राजनीतिक संस्कृतियों का एक और विभाजन आधुनिक रूप और परम्परागत रूप के बीच किया जाता है। यह विभाजन आधुनिक तकनीकों के प्रति अभिरूप रखने वाले लोगों को परम्परागत आदर्शों में विश्वास रखने वाले लोगों से अलग करते हैं। जैसे-जैसे इस क्षेत्र में विकास होता जाता है, वैसेवैसे शहरी और देहाती क्षेत्रों की विचारधारा में अन्तर बढ़ जाता है।

9. राजनीतिक संस्कृति में परम्पराओं की भूमिका (Role of traditions in Political Culture) राजनीतिक संस्कृति चाहे विकसित हो, चाहे अविकसित राजनीतिक परम्पराओं, आदतों तथा प्रथाओं से अवश्य प्रभावित होती है। वास्तव में, परम्पराएं ही राजनीतिक संस्कृतियों को विशिष्टता और सार्थकता प्रदान करती हैं। रिचार्ड रोज़ (Richard Rose) ने इंग्लैंड का उदाहरण देते हुए कहा है कि परम्परा और आधुनिकता के मिश्रण से इंग्लैण्ड के विकास को सन्तुलन एवं स्थायित्व प्राप्त हुआ।

10. राजनीतिक संस्कृति के निर्माणकारी तत्त्व (Foundations of Political Culture)-राजनीतिक संस्कृति के निर्माणकारी तत्त्व और चिह्न अनेक हैं। इसके निर्माणकारी तत्त्वों में ऐतिहासिक विकास, देश का भूगोल, सामाजिक तथा आर्थिक संरचना महत्त्वपूर्ण है और इसके चिह्नों में राष्ट्रीय ध्वज और राष्ट्रीय गान महत्त्वपूर्ण है। कुछ राज्यों में धार्मिक चिह्नों को अधिक महत्त्व दिया जाता है। कुछ राज्यों में ये राष्ट्रीय एकता के प्रतीक माने जाते हैं और कुछ राज्यों की राजनीतिक संस्कृति में पौराणिक अथवा काल्पनिक कथाओं का महत्त्व भी होता है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति स्थिर नहीं होती। उसका विकास होता रहता है।

लघु उत्तरीय प्रश्न-

प्रश्न 1.
राजनीतिक सभ्याचार से आप क्या समझते हैं ?
अथवा
राजनीतिक संस्कृति का अर्थ लिखिए।
उत्तर-
किसी देश के राजनीतिक चरित्र और आदतों की, राजनीतिक सूझ-बूझ और व्यवहार की, राजनीतिक संस्थाओं और उनकी कार्य पद्धति की मिली-जुली धारा को उस समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति (सभ्याचार) कहते हैं। राजनीतिक संस्कृति की अवधारणा के जन्मदाता गैब्रील आल्मण्ड ने राजनीतिक संस्कृति की व्याख्या इस प्रकार की है”राजनीतिक संस्कृति का विचार इस ओर संकेत करता है कि किसी भी समाज की परम्पराएं, सार्वजनिक संस्थाओं की भावनाएं, नागरिकों के सामूहिक तर्क शक्ति और भावावेश तथा उसके नेताओं की कार्य शैली केवल ऐतिहासिक अनुभव की बेतरतीब उपज मात्र नहीं है बल्कि वे सब आपस में एक बड़ी सार्थक इकाई के रूप में संगठित की जा सकती हैं और उनके द्वारा सम्बन्धों का तानाबाना बुना जा सकता है जो सार्थक रूप में समझा जा सके। राजनीतिक संस्कृति व्यक्ति को उसके राजनीतिक आचरण का नियन्त्रणकारी आदेश देती है तथा उसकी सामूहिकता को इस प्रकार के मूल्यों एवं तर्कों की एक ऐसी व्यवस्थित संरचना प्रदान करती है जो संस्थाओं और संगठनों के कार्य निष्पादन में तालमेल स्थापित करती है।”

प्रश्न 2.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति को परिभाषित कीजिए।
उत्तर-

ऐलन आर० बाल के शब्दों में, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति उन अभिवृत्तियों और विश्वासों तथा भावनाओं और समाज के मूल्यों से मिलकर बनती है जिनका सम्बन्ध राजनीतिक पद्धति और राजनीतिक प्रश्नों से होता है।”
आल्मण्ड और पॉवेल के अनुसार, “संस्कृति किसी भी राजनीतिक प्रणाली के सदस्यों में राजनीति के प्रति पाए जाने वाले अभिमुखन और अभिवृत्तियों का स्वरूप है।”
सैम्यूल बीयर का कहना है, “लोगों के मूल्य, विश्वास व भावात्मक वृत्तियों की सरकार को किस प्रकास के संचालित होना चाहिए और उसे क्या करना चाहिए, ही राजनीतिक संस्कृति के तत्त्व हैं।” ।
राय मैक्रीडिस के अनुसार, “सामान्य लक्ष्य तथा सामान्य स्वीकृत नियम ही राजनीतिक संस्कृति का अर्थ है।”

प्रश्न 3.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति सभ्याचार की चार विशेषताओं का वर्णन करें।
अथवा
राजनीतिक संस्कृति-सभ्याचार की कोई चार विशेषताएं लिखो।
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की मुख्य विशेषताएं निम्नलिखित हैं

राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है-राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है जो लोगों की राजनीतिक प्रणाली के प्रति अभिवृत्तियों, विश्वासों, मूल्यों, मनोभावनाओं आदि से बनती है। किसी देश के राजनीतिक चरित्र और आदतों की राजनीतिक सूझ-बूझ और व्यवहार की राजनीतिक संस्थाओं और उनकी कार्य पद्धति की मिलीजुली धारा को उस समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति कहते हैं।
राजनीतिक संस्कृति सामान्य संस्कृति का भाग है-प्रत्येक राजनीतिक व्यवस्था की राजनीतिक संस्कृति मूल रूप से उस समाज की संस्कृति से ही प्रभावित होती है। प्रत्येक व्यवस्था की राजनीतिक संस्कृति अपने मुख्य तत्त्व, अपने आदर्श, अपने मूल्य उस व्यवस्था की सामान्य संस्कृति से ही ग्रहण करते हैं।
विभिन्न राजनीतिक प्रणालियों की विभिन्न राजनीतिक संस्कृति-राजनीतिक संस्कृति के विद्वानों का यह मत है कि विभिन्न राजनीतिक प्रणालियों की राजनीतिक संस्कृति भी विभिन्न होती है। ऐंग्लो-अमेरिकन राजनीतिक प्रणालियों (इंग्लैण्ड और अमेरिका) की राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक-जैसी है। महाद्वीपीय यूरोपीय राजनीतिक प्रणालियों (फ्रांस, इटली, नार्वे आदि) की राजनीतिक संस्कृति दूसरी प्रकार की है।
गतिशीलता-राजनीतिक संस्कृति स्थिर न होकर गतिशील होती है।

प्रश्न 4.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के धर्म-निरपेक्षीकरण से आपका क्या अभिप्राय है ?
अथवा
निरपेक्ष राजनीतिक सभ्याचार किसे कहते हैं ?
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति समय और परिस्थितियों के अनुसार बदलती रहती है। किसी देश की राजनीतिक संस्कृति स्थायी नहीं होती। राजनीतिक संस्कृति में जब परिवर्तन के फलस्वरूप लोग अपने राजनीतिक दृष्टिकोण में विवेकपूर्ण (Rational), विश्लेषणात्मक (Analytical) और व्यावहारिक बनते चले जाते हैं तो इसको राजनीतिक संस्कृति का धर्म-निरपेक्षीकरण कहा जाता है। राजनीतिक संस्कृति के धर्म-निरपेक्षीकरण में लोगों के राजनीतिक विश्वास, दृष्टिकोण तथा विचार संकुचित न होकर अत्यधिक व्यापक होते हैं। लोगों को राजनीतिक सहभागी (Political Participation) तथा राजनीतिक भर्ती (Political Recruitment) के बारे में काफ़ी जानकारी प्राप्त होती है और वे राजनीतिक प्रणाली की वैधता (Legitimacy) के सम्बन्ध में विवेकपूर्ण निर्णय करने की स्थिति में होते हैं। धर्मनिरपेक्षीकरण राजनीतिक संस्कृति में लोगों में जागृति और राजनीतिक बुद्धिमत्ता बहुत अधिक होती है। लोगों में राजनीतिक प्रणाली को समझने की शक्ति होती है और वे किसी भी राजनीतिक समस्या पर निष्पक्ष होकर अपनी राय देने की स्थिति में होते हैं।

प्रश्न 5.
राजनैतिक सभ्याचार को प्रभावित करने वाले कोई चार तत्त्व लिखिए।
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के निर्धारक तत्त्व इस प्रकार हैं

ऐतिहासिक आधार- इतिहास और इतिहास की घटनाएं राजनीतिक संस्कृति को सबसे अधिक प्रभावित करती हैं। कोई भी राजनीतिक व्यवस्था इतिहास के अनुभवों और शिक्षाओं को भुला नहीं सकती।
भौगोलिक आधार- भूगोल एक स्थायी तत्त्व है, इसलिए राजनीतिक संस्कृति को प्रभावित करने वाला यह दूसरा प्रमुख आधार है।
सामाजिक बहुलता-राजनीतिक संस्कृति के निर्माणकारी तत्त्वों में सामाजिक बहुलता का भी अपना विशेष महत्त्व है। सामाजिक बहुलता तथा विविधता वाले समाज में अनेक उप-संस्कृतियों का निर्माण होता है।
शिक्षा का प्रचार एवं प्रसार भी राजनीतिक संस्कृति का एक निर्धारित तथ्य है।

प्रश्न 6.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति में टेलीविज़न की क्या भूमिका है ?
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति में टेलीविज़न की महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिका है। वर्तमान समय में टेलीविज़न प्रचार का एक महत्त्वपूर्ण साधन है। इसमें समय-समय पर सामाजिक विषयों पर चर्चा प्रसारित की जाती है तथा विभिन्न देशों की अलग-अलग संस्कृतियों के विषय में बताया जाता है। टेलीविज़न में विभिन्न राजनीतिक गतिविधियों एवं घटनाओं से सम्बन्धित समाचार प्रसारित किए जाते हैं। इन सब का दर्शकों के दिमाग पर प्रभाव पड़ना स्वाभाविक है, क्योंकि दर्शक जिस प्रकार के कार्यक्रम टेलीविज़न में देखते हैं, उसी प्रकार से उनके विचार और मूल्य बनते हैं।

अति लघु उत्तरीय प्रश्न-

प्रश्न 1.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति से आप क्या समझते हैं ?
उत्तर–
किसी देश के राजनीतिक चरित्र और आदतों की, राजनीतिक सूझ-बूझ और व्यवहार की, राजनीतिक संस्थाओं और उनकी कार्य पद्धति की मिली-जुली धारा को उस समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति कहते हैं।

प्रश्न 2.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की परिभाषाएं बताएं।
उत्तर-

ऐलन आर० बाल के शब्दों में, “राजनीतिक संस्कृति उन अभिवृत्तियों और विश्वासों तथा भावनाओं और समाज के मूल्यों से मिलकर बनती है जिनका सम्बन्ध राजनीतिक पद्धति और राजनीतिक प्रश्नों से होता है।”
आल्मण्ड और पॉवेल के अनुसार, “संस्कृति किसी भी राजनीतिक प्रणाली के सदस्यों में राजनीति के प्रति पाए जाने वाले अभिमुखन और अभिवृत्तियों का स्वरूप है।”

प्रश्न 3.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के तीन अंगों के नाम लिखें।
उत्तर-

(1) ज्ञानात्मक दिशामान (Congnitive Orientation)
प्रभावात्मक दिशामान (Affective Orientation)
मूल्यांकिक दिशामान (Evaluation Orientation)।

प्रश्न 4.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की कोई दो विशेषताओं का वर्णन कीजिए। (P.B. 2017)
उत्तर-

राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है-राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है जो लोगों की राजनीतिक प्रणाली के प्रति अभिवृत्तियों, विश्वासों, मूल्यों, मनोभावनाओं आदि से बनती है। किसी देश के राजनीतिक चरित्र और आदतों की राजनीतिक सूझ-बूझ और व्यवहार की राजनीतिक संस्थाओं और उनकी कार्य पद्धति की मिली-जुली धारा को उस समाज की राजनीतिक संस्कृति कहते हैं।
राजनीतिक संस्कृति सामान्य संस्कृति का भाग है-प्रत्येक राजनीतिक व्यवस्था की राजनीतिक संस्कृति मूल रूप से उस समाज की संस्कृति से ही प्रभावित होती है। प्रत्येक व्यवस्था की राजनीतिक संस्कृति अपने मुख्य तत्त्व, अपने आदर्श, अपने मूल्य उस व्यवस्था की सामान्य संस्कृति से ही ग्रहण करते हैं।

वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न-

प्रश्न I. एक शब्द/वाक्य वाले प्रश्न-उत्तर-

प्रश्न 1.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति का कोई एक अंग या भाग लिखें।
उत्तर-
ज्ञानात्मक आचरण।

प्रश्न 2.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के ज्ञानात्मक आचरण का अर्थ लिखें।
उत्तर-
ज्ञानात्मक आचरण का मूल अभिप्राय यह होता है कि किसी देश के व्यक्तियों का अपनी राजनीतिक प्रणाली के विषय में कितना ज्ञान है।

प्रश्न 3.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के मूल्यांकनकारी आचरण का क्या अर्थ है ?
उत्तर-
मूल्यांकनकारी आचरण से अभिप्राय यह है कि किसी देश के लोग अपनी राजनीतिक प्रणाली की कार्यविधि का कितना निष्पक्ष मूल्यांकन करते हैं।

प्रश्न 4.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति का कोई एक तथ्य लिखें।
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक मूल्य (Political Values)

प्रश्न 5.
किस प्रकार के तथ्य राजनीतिक संस्कृति के मूल आधार माने जाते हैं ?
उत्तर-
ऐतिहासिक तथ्य, भौगोलिक तथ्य तथा सामाजिक-आर्थिक तथ्य राजनीतिक संस्कृति के मूल आधार माने जाते हैं।

प्रश्न 6.
आलमण्ड के अनुसार राजनीतिक संस्कृति का कोई एक रूप लिखें।
उत्तर-
संकीर्ण या सीमित संस्कृति (Parochial Political Culture)।

प्रश्न 7.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति किसका भाग है ?
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति सामान्य संस्कृति का भाग है।

प्रश्न 8.
किस विद्वान् ने राजनीतिक संस्कृति की विस्तृत व्याख्या की है ?
उत्तर-
लुसियन पाई ने राजनीतिक संस्कृति की विस्तृत व्याख्या की है।

प्रश्न 9.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की अवधारणा का सर्वप्रथम प्रयोग किस विद्वान ने किया ?
उत्तर-
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की अवधारणा का सर्वप्रथम प्रयोग आल्मण्ड ने किया था।

प्रश्न 10.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के दो तत्त्व लिखो।
अथवा
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के दो मुख्य अंग लिखिए।
उत्तर-
(1) राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक व्यापक धारणा है।
(2) राजनीतिक संस्कृति सामान्य संस्कृति का भाग है।

प्रश्न II. खाली स्थान भरें-

1. राजनीति संस्कृति शब्द का सबसे पहले प्रयोग ………… ने किया।
2. राजनीति संस्कृति का सबसे पहले प्रयोग सन् ……….. में किया गया।
3. आल्मण्ड ने राजनीति संस्कृति का प्रयोग अपने एक लेख ……….. में किया।
4. आल्मण्ड द्वारा लिखा गया लेख ……….. में छपा।
5. ……… के अनुसार सामान्य लक्ष्य तथा सामान्य स्वीकृत नियम ही राजनीति संस्कृति का अर्थ है।
उत्तर-

गेबरील आल्मण्ड
1956
Comparative Political System
जनरल ऑफ पोलिटिकल साईंस
राय मैक्रीडिस।

प्रश्न III. निम्नलिखित वाक्यों में से सही एवं ग़लत का चुनाव करें-

1. राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक परम्परागत धारणा है।
2. राजनीतिक संस्कृति का प्रयोग सर्वप्रथम प्लेटो ने किया।
3. राजनीति संस्कृति की धारणा का मुख्य समर्थक आल्मण्ड है।
4. फाइनर के अनुसार राष्ट्र की राजनीति मुख्यत: शासकों, राजनीतिक संस्थाओं तथा प्रक्रियाओं की वैधता से सम्बन्धित है।
5. राजनीतिक संस्कृति एक संकुचित धारणा है।
उत्तर-

ग़लत
ग़लत
सही
सही
ग़लत।

प्रश्न IV. बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति में क्या सम्मिलित नहीं है ?
(क) राजनीतिक मूल्य
(ख) राजनीतिक विश्वास
(ग) राजनीतिक दृष्टिकोण
(घ) हित समूह।
उत्तर-
(घ) हित समूह।

प्रश्न 2.
‘Political Culture and Political Development’ का लेखक कौन है ?
(क) सिडनी वर्बा
(ख) लूसियन पाई
(ग) रोज और डोगन
(घ) एलन आर० बाल।
उत्तर-
(ख) लूसियन पाई

प्रश्न 3.
आल्मण्ड के अनुसार राजनीतिक संस्कृति के घटक हैं
(क) प्रभावात्मक अनुकूलन
(ख) ज्ञानात्मक अनुकूलन
(ग) मूल्यांकन अनुकूलन
(घ) उपरोक्त सभी।
उत्तर-
(घ) उपरोक्त सभी।

प्रश्न 4.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति के महत्त्व है –
(क) राजनीतिक शिक्षा
(ख) कानून एवं व्यवस्था
(ग) राजनीतिक स्थिरता
(घ) उपरोक्त सभी।
उत्तर-
(घ) उपरोक्त सभी।

प्रश्न 5.
राजनीतिक संस्कृति की धारणा का प्रयोग सर्वप्रथम किस वर्ष किया गया ?
(क) 1856
(ख) 1956
(ग) 1789
(घ) 1950.
उत्तर-
(ख) 1956